sl - mercedes-benz usa · sl operator'smanual orderno.p231005313 partno.2315842101...

SLOperator's Manual

Order no. P231 0053 13 Part no. 231 584 21 01 Edition A 2017

É2315842101qËÍ2315842101

SLOp

erator

'sMa

nual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells youwhere you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

As at 29.06.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Ignoring themcould result in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2315842101 É2315842101qËÍ

Index ....................................................... 3

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22

Introduction ......................................... 23

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 71

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 94

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105

Climate control ................................. 113

Driving and parking .......................... 123

On-board computer and displays .... 189

Multimedia system ........................... 240

Stowage and features ...................... 246

Maintenance and care ...................... 261

Breakdown assistance ..................... 271

Wheels and tires ............................... 286

Technical data ................................... 310

2 Contents

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 205Function/notes ................................ 58Important safety notes .................... 58Warning lamp ................................. 233

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 54

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 245

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 116Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 198Display message ............................ 221Function/information .................... 183

Active Body Control (ABC)CURVE ........................................... 168Vehicle level .................................. 166

Active Body Control (ABC) (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles)

Comfort ......................................... 167Driving dynamics display ............... 168Normal level .................................. 167Operation/notes ............................ 166Raised level ................................... 167Sport .............................................. 167Sport Plus ...................................... 167Vehicle level .................................. 166

Active Body Control (ABC)(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Comfort ......................................... 170Driving dynamics display ............... 170Normal level .................................. 169Operation/notes ............................ 168Raised level ................................... 169Sport .............................................. 170Vehicle level .................................. 168

Active Body Control (exceptMercedes-AMG Vehicles)

Display message ............................ 219Active Body Control (Mercedes-AMG Vehicles)

Display message ............................ 219Active Brake Assist

Activating or deactivating .............. 197Display message ............................ 210Function/notes ................................ 60

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

Activating or deactivating .............. 197Display message ............................ 211Function/notes ................................ 67Important safety notes .................... 67Warning lamp ................................. 238

Active Driving Assistance package .. 183Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 198Display message ............................ 221Function/information .................... 186

Active light function ......................... 107Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 174Exiting a parking space .................. 176Function/notes ............................. 173Important safety notes .................. 173Parking .......................................... 175

Adaptive adjustable dampingDriving dynamics display ............... 166

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 62Adaptive Damping System

Function/notes ............................. 165Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 216Function/notes ............................. 107Switching on/off ........................... 108

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 315Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Adjusting the volumeAudio 20 ........................................ 241COMAND ....................................... 241

Index 3

Air bagsDeployment ..................................... 51Display message ............................ 214Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 45Head bag ......................................... 46Important safety notes .................... 44Introduction ..................................... 44Knee bag .......................................... 45Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 46PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 40Side impact air bag .......................... 45

AIR FLOW ........................................... 117Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 121Important safety notes .................. 121Setting ........................................... 121Setting the blower output of theAIRSCARF vents ............................. 122Setting the center air vents ........... 121Setting the side air vents ............... 121Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 98

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRSCARFSwitching on/off .............................. 98

AIRSCARF ventsSetting the blower output .............. 122

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69Switching off (ATA) .......................... 69Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 69

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 199Setting the color (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 201Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 251

Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 197Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 196ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 265Hiding a service message .............. 265Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 265Service message ............................ 265Special service requirements ......... 265

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 69Function ........................................... 69Switching off the alarm .................... 69

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 197Display message ............................ 220Function/notes ............................. 180

Audio 20Switching on/off ........................... 241

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 194Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 216see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 266Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 128Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 127Automatic headlamp mode .............. 105Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 136Changing gear ............................... 136Display message ............................ 226Drive program ................................ 137Drive program display .................... 134Driving tips .................................... 136DYNAMICSELECT button (all vehi-cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 131

4 Index

DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 132Emergency running mode .............. 143Engaging drive position .................. 135Engaging neutral ............................ 135Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 135Engaging reverse gear ................... 135Engaging the park position ............ 134Gearshift recommendation ............ 141Kickdown ....................................... 137Manual shifting .............................. 139Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 201Overview ........................................ 133Problem (malfunction) ................... 143Pulling away ................................... 126Selector lever ................................ 133Starting the engine ........................ 126Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 139Transmission position display ........ 134Transmission positions .................. 136

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 143

BBack button ....................................... 241BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 58Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 74Important safety notes .................... 73Replacing ......................................... 74

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 277Display message ............................ 218Important safety notes .................. 275Jump starting ................................. 279Overview ........................................ 275

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot Assistsee Active Blind Spot Assist

Bluetooth®Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 245Searching for a mobile phone ........ 244

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240Telephony ...................................... 243

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction

Function/notes ................................ 59Important safety notes .................... 59

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 210Notes ............................................. 315

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 216

BrakesABS .................................................. 58Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 62BAS .................................................. 58Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction ........................................... 59Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 315Display message ............................ 205EBD .................................................. 66High-performance brake system .... 151Important safety notes .................. 150Maintenance .................................. 151Parking brake ................................ 146Riding tips ...................................... 150Warning lamp ................................. 232

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 271see Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 32

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Index 5

CareCar wash ........................................ 266Exhaust pipe .................................. 270Exterior lights ................................ 269Matte finish ................................... 268Notes ............................................. 266Paint .............................................. 267Power washer ................................ 267Rear view camera .......................... 270Sensors ......................................... 269Washing by hand ........................... 267Wheels ........................................... 268Windows ........................................ 269Wiper blades .................................. 269

CDsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 195Center console

Lower section .................................. 35Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 36Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 200Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 71

ChildRestraint system .............................. 56

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 57On the front-passenger seat ............ 57Rearward-facing restraint system .... 57

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 55

Cigarette lighter ................................ 251Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 269Climate control

Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 114Controlling automatically ............... 117Cooling with air dehumidification .. 116Defrosting the windows ................. 119Defrosting the windshield .............. 118General notes ................................ 113Indicator lamp ................................ 117Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 115

Maximum cooling .......................... 119Overview of systems ...................... 113Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 120Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 117Refrigerant ..................................... 316Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 317Setting the air distribution ............. 118Setting the air vents ...................... 121Setting the airflow ......................... 118Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 117Setting the temperature ................ 117Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 120Switching on/off ........................... 116Switching residual heat on/off ...... 120Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 119Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 118

CockpitOverview .......................................... 31see Instrument cluster

COMANDDriving dynamics display (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 166, 168Driving dynamics display(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 170Switching on/off ........................... 241

Combination switch .......................... 106Connecting a USB device


Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 192Controller ........................................... 241Convenience closing feature .............. 85Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 263Display message ............................ 217Filling capacity ............................... 316Important safety notes .................. 315Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201Temperature gauge ........................ 190Warning lamp ................................. 236

6 Index

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 30Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 216Function/notes ............................. 107

Cruise controlCruise control lever ....................... 153Deactivating ................................... 154Display message ............................ 224Driving system ............................... 152Function/notes ............................. 152Important safety notes .................. 153Setting a speed .............................. 154Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 153

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 250Important safety notes .................. 250

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 27Customer Relations Department ....... 27

DData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 195Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 216Function/notes ............................. 105Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199

Declarations of conformity ................. 26Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Interior lighting .............................. 200

Diagnostics connection ...................... 27Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 22Introduction ..................................... 22

Digital speedometer ......................... 193Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 265Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 204Driving systems ............................. 219

Engine ............................................ 217General notes ................................ 204Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 204KEYLESS-GO .................................. 230Lights ............................................. 216Safety systems .............................. 205SmartKey ....................................... 229Tires ............................................... 225Vehicle ........................................... 226

Distance Pilot DISTRONICActivating ....................................... 156Calling up a speed ......................... 157Cruise control lever ....................... 156Display Message ............................ 222Displays in the instrument cluster .. 159Driving tips .................................... 160Function/notes ............................. 154Important safety notes .................. 155Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 158Stopping ........................................ 158Storing a speed .............................. 157Switching off .................................. 160Warning lamp ................................. 238

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 238Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 61Doors

Automatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 200Automatic locking (switch) ............... 77Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 71Control panel ................................... 38Display message ............................ 228Emergency locking ........................... 78Emergency unlocking ....................... 78Important safety notes .................... 76Opening (from inside) ...................... 77Overview .......................................... 76Power closing .................................. 78

Drinking and driving ......................... 148Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 137Display ........................................... 134

Index 7

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 202Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 266Driving on flooded roads .................. 152Driving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 60Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 58Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function ................................. 67ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 62BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 58Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction ........................................... 59Distance warning function ............... 61EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 66ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 63Important safety information ........... 58Overview .......................................... 57STEER CONTROL ............................. 69

Driving systemActive Body Control (ABC) (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 166Active Body Control (ABC)(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 168Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot ... 161RACE START (Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ........................................ 164

Driving systemsActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 183Active Driving Assistance pack-age ................................................. 183Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 186Active Parking Assist ..................... 173Adaptive Damping System ............. 165ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180Cruise control ................................ 152Display message ............................ 219DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 154HOLD function ............................... 163PARKTRONIC ................................. 170Rear view camera .......................... 177

Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 181Driving tips

AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 151Automatic transmission ................. 136Brakes ........................................... 150Break-in period .............................. 123Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 160Downhill gradient ........................... 150Drinking and driving ....................... 148Driving in winter ............................. 152Driving on flooded roads ................ 152Driving on wet roads ...................... 152Exhaust check ............................... 148Fuel ................................................ 148General .......................................... 147Hydroplaning ................................. 152Icy road surfaces ........................... 152Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 151Snow chains .................................. 288Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 150Wet road surface ........................... 150

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 195see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 131DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 132

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 200Function/notes ................................ 99

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 100Function/notes ................................ 99Switching on/off ........................... 200

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 207Function/notes ................................ 66

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 148On-board computer ....................... 192

8 Index

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 128Automatic engine switch-off .......... 127Deactivating/activating ................. 128General information ....................... 127Important safety notes .................. 127Introduction ................................... 127

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 54

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 78Trunk ............................................... 83Vehicle ............................................. 78

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 51

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 24

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 236Display message ............................ 217ECO start/stop function ................ 127Engine number ............................... 312Irregular running ............................ 130Jump-starting ................................. 279Starting problems .......................... 130Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 126Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 126Switching off .................................. 145Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 283

Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 310Problem (malfunction) ................... 130

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 262Additives ........................................ 315Checking the oil level ..................... 262Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 262Display message ............................ 218Filling capacity ............................... 315General notes ................................ 314Notes about oil grades ................... 314Notes on oil level/consumption .... 262

Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 202Characteristics ................................. 63Deactivating/activating (buttonin Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 65Deactivating/activating (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 64Display message ............................ 205Function/notes ................................ 63General notes .................................. 63Important safety information ........... 63Warning lamp ................................. 233

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 63Exhaust check ................................... 148Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 270Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 105see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 101Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 201Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 101Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 103Storing the parking position .......... 102

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 247

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 242Filler cap

see RefuelingFilling capacities (Technical data) ... 312Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 272Preparing the vehicle ..................... 271

Index 9

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 273Floormats ........................................... 260Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 310Two-way radio ................................ 310

Front-passenger seatAdjusting from the driver's seat ....... 96

FuelAdditives ........................................ 314Consumption statistics .................. 192Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 192Displaying the range ...................... 192Driving tips .................................... 148Fuel gauge ....................................... 32Grade (gasoline) ............................ 313Important safety notes .................. 313Problem (malfunction) ................... 145Refueling ........................................ 143Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 313

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 144

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 192

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 313Problem (malfunction) ................... 145

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 271Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 283Before changing ............................. 284Dashboard fuse box ....................... 284Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 284Fuse box in the rear compartment .. 285Important safety notes .................. 283

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 260General notes ................................ 257Important safety notes .................. 257Opening/closing the garage door .. 259Problems when programming ........ 259

Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 257Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 258

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201Genuine parts ...................................... 23Glove box ........................................... 246Google™ Local Search


HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 80Hazard warning lamps

Display message ............................ 229Switching on/off ........................... 107

Head bagsDisplay message ............................ 213Operation ......................................... 46

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 98Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 96see NECK-PRO head restraints

Headlampssee Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 106High-beam headlamps


Hill start assist .................................. 127HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 164Activation conditions ..................... 163Deactivating ................................... 164Display message ............................ 221General notes ................................ 163

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

HoodClosing ........................................... 262Display message ............................ 228Important safety notes .................. 261

10 Index

Opening ......................................... 261Horn ...................................................... 31Hydroplaning ..................................... 152

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 69Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signalsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 32Instrument cluster lighting .............. 189Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 109Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 200Overview ........................................ 108Reading lamp ................................. 108Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 199

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

JJack

Storage location ............................ 271Using ............................................. 305

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 279

KKey positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 124SmartKey ....................................... 124

KEYLESS-GOActivating ......................................... 71Convenience closing feature ............ 85Deactivation ..................................... 71Display message ............................ 230Locking ............................................ 71

Removing the Start/Stop button ... 125Start/Stop button .......................... 124Starting the engine ........................ 126Unlocking ......................................... 71

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 137Manual gearshifting ....................... 142

Knee bag .............................................. 45

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping AssistLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 202License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 216Light function, active

Display message ............................ 216Light sensor (display message) ....... 216Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 200Active light function ....................... 107Automatic headlamp mode ............ 105Cornering light function ................. 107Hazard warning lamps ................... 107High beam flasher .......................... 106High-beam headlamps ................... 106Light switch ................................... 105Low-beam headlamps .................... 106Parking lamps ................................ 106Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 199Standing lamps .............................. 106Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 199Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 199Turn signals ................................... 106

Index 11

see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Loading aid (trunk)Raising/lowering the roof .............. 248

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 77Emergency locking ........................... 78From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 77

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 200Low-beam headlamps


Luggage coversee Trunk partition

MM+S tires ............................................ 288MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 91Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 268mbrace

Call priority .................................... 256Display message ............................ 210Emergency call .............................. 253General notes ................................ 252MB info call button ........................ 255Remote fault diagnosis .................. 256Roadside Assistance button .......... 255Self-test ......................................... 253System .......................................... 253

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 73General notes .................................. 73Inserting .......................................... 73Locking vehicle ................................ 78Removing ......................................... 73Unlocking the driver's door .............. 78

Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 195Memory function ............................... 103Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 183Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 186Active Parking Assist ..................... 173ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot ... 161PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 54Rear view camera .......................... 177Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 181

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 204Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorsMobile phone

Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 243Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 245Frequencies ................................... 310Installation ..................................... 310Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195Transmission output (maximum) .... 310

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 72MOExtended tires .............................. 272Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 308Mounting a new wheel ................... 307Preparing the vehicle ..................... 304Raising the vehicle ......................... 305Removing a wheel .......................... 307Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 305

MP3Operation ....................................... 195see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 191Permanent display ......................... 198

12 Index

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 190Overview .......................................... 33

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

NECK-PRO head restraintsImportant safety notes .................... 53Operation ......................................... 53Resetting triggered .......................... 53

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 123

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 46Faults ............................................... 50Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 49

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 44Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 54Children in the vehicle ..................... 54Important safety notes .................... 39Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 39Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 46PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 40Pets in the vehicle ........................... 57PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 53PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 54Restraint system warning lamp ........ 39

OCSConditions ....................................... 46

Faults ............................................... 50Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 49

Odometer ........................................... 192Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 201Assistance menu ........................... 196Audio menu ................................... 194Convenience submenu .................. 200Display messages .......................... 204Displaying a service message ........ 265Factory settings submenu ............. 201Important safety notes .................. 189Instrument cluster submenu .......... 198Lighting submenu .......................... 199Menu overview .............................. 192Message memory .......................... 204Navigation menu ............................ 193Operation ....................................... 190RACETIMER ................................... 202Service menu ................................. 198Settings menu ............................... 198Standard display ............................ 192Telephone menu ............................ 195Trip menu ...................................... 192Vehicle submenu ........................... 200Video DVD operation ..................... 195

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 26Important safety notes .................... 26

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 22

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 24

Outside temperature display ........... 189Overhead control panel ...................... 37

PPaddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shiftersPaint code number ............................ 311Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 267Panic alarm .......................................... 39

Index 13

Panoramic roofOperating the roller sunblind ........... 91

ParkingImportant safety notes .................. 145Parking brake ................................ 146Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 102Rear view camera .......................... 177see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 173see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeApplying automatically ................... 147Applying or releasing manually ...... 146Display message ............................ 207Electric parking brake .................... 146Emergency braking ........................ 147General notes ................................ 146Releasing automatically ................. 147Warning lamp ................................. 235

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 106

Parking PilotDisplay Message ............................ 222

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 172Driving system ............................... 170Function/notes ............................. 170Important safety notes .................. 170Problem (malfunction) ................... 173Range of the sensors ..................... 171Warning display ............................. 172

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 214Indicator lamps ................................ 40Problems (malfunction) .................. 214

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 57Phone book


Power locks ......................................... 78Power washers .................................. 267Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 210Operation ......................................... 53

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 54Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69Immobilizer ...................................... 69

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 23

Pulling awayGeneral notes ................................ 126

Pulling away (automatic transmis-sion) .................................................... 126

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 28

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27

RRACE START

Important safety notes .................. 164RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 164RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 202Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 194see separate operating instructions

Radio modesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Reading lamp ..................................... 108Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 216Rear lamps

see LightsRear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 270Display in the multimedia system .. 177

14 Index

Function/notes ............................. 177Switching on/off ........................... 177

Rear window defrosterGeneral notes ................................ 119Problem (malfunction) ................... 120Switching on/off ........................... 119

Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ....................... 102

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 316Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 32Important safety notes .................. 143Refueling process .......................... 144see Fuel

Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 257

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 109

Reporting safety defects .................... 27Rescue card ......................................... 28Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 219Warning lamp ................................. 236

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 120Restraint system

Display message ............................ 212Introduction ..................................... 39Warning lamp ................................. 235Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 135Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 84Trunk lid ........................................... 79

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 216Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25Roll bar

Display message ............................ 212Operation ......................................... 50

Roller sunblind .................................... 91Roof

Display message ............................ 228

Important safety notes .................... 87Opening/closing (with roofswitch) ............................................. 88Opening/closing (with Smart-Key) ................................................. 89Overview .......................................... 87Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93Relocking ......................................... 89

Roof switch .......................................... 88Route guidance


SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 54see Occupant safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD memory cardEjecting .......................................... 245Inserting ........................................ 245Inserting/removing ........................ 245see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240Selecting ........................................ 195

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 43Correct usage .................................. 42Fastening ......................................... 42Important safety guidelines ............. 41Introduction ..................................... 40Releasing ......................................... 43Seat belt guide ................................. 96Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 201Warning lamp ................................. 231Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 95Adjusting the head restraint ............ 96Belt guide ......................................... 96Correct driver's seat position ........... 94

Index 15

Important safety notes .................... 94Overview .......................................... 94Seat heating problem ...................... 98Seat ventilation problem .................. 98Sliding forward/back ....................... 97Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 103Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 98Switching seat heating on/off ......... 97Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 98

Selector leverPositions ........................................ 133

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 269Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 198Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 315Coolant (engine) ............................ 315Engine oil ....................................... 314Fuel ................................................ 313Important safety notes .................. 312Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 316Washer fluid ................................... 316

Setting the air distribution ............... 118Setting the airflow ............................ 118Setting the date/time format


Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 201On-board computer ....................... 198

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 202Side impact air bag ............................. 45Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 216Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 269Convenience closing feature ............ 85

Important safety information ........... 83Opening/closing (all) ....................... 85Opening/closing (front) ................... 84Opening/closing (rear) .................... 84Overview .......................................... 83Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87Resetting ......................................... 86Reversing feature ............................. 84

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 74Changing the programming ............. 72Checking the battery ....................... 74Display message ............................ 229Door central locking/unlocking ....... 71Important safety notes .................... 71Loss ................................................. 75Mechanical key ................................ 73Opening/closing the roof ................ 89Overview .......................................... 71Positions (ignition lock) ................. 124Problem (malfunction) ..................... 75Starting the engine ........................ 126

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Snow chains ...................................... 288Sockets

Front-passenger footwell ............... 252General notes ................................ 252Trunk ............................................. 252

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 241

Special seat belt retractor .................. 55Specialist workshop ............................ 27Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 193In the Instrument cluster ................. 32Segments ...................................... 189Selecting the display unit ............... 198

SPORT handling modeDeactivating/activating(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 65Warning lamp ................................. 235

16 Index

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 216Switching on/off ........................... 106

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 125STEER CONTROL .................................. 69Steering

Display message ............................ 228Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Activating/deactivating ................. 197Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot

Display message ............................ 224Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 190Important safety notes .................... 99Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 103

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 139Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 202Stowage areas ................................... 246Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 246Center console .............................. 247Center console (rear) ..................... 247Cup holders ................................... 250Eyeglasses compartment ............... 247Glove box ....................................... 246Important safety information ......... 246Rear ............................................... 248Stowage net ................................... 248

Stowage net ....................................... 248Stowage space

Umbrella holder ............................. 247Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 250Summer tires ..................................... 288Sun visor ............................................ 251Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 199

Suspension settingsActive Body Control (ABC) (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 167Active Body Control (ABC)(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 169SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 202

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 120Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 245

TTachometer ........................................ 189Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 216see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 32

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 312Information .................................... 310Tires/wheels ................................. 308Vehicle data ................................... 317

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 256Emergency call .............................. 253General notes ................................ 252MB info call button ........................ 255Roadside Assistance button .......... 255Self-test ......................................... 253System .......................................... 253Vehicle Health Check .................... 256

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 196Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 244Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 243Display message ............................ 228Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195Number from the phone book ........ 196Redialing ........................................ 196Rejecting/ending a call ................. 196see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Index 17

Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 245

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 190Coolant (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201Outside temperature ...................... 189Setting (climate control) ................ 117Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 201

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 202Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 292Checking manually ........................ 292Display message ............................ 225Maximum ....................................... 291Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 274Notes ............................................. 290Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 274Recommended ............................... 289

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 293Function/notes ............................. 292General notes ................................ 292Important safety notes .................. 292Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 295Restarting ...................................... 294Warning lamp ................................. 239Warning message .......................... 294

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 271TIREFIT kit .......................................... 273

Important safety notes .................. 273Storage location ............................ 271Tire pressure not reached .............. 274Tire pressure reached .................... 274

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 303Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 302Bar (definition) ............................... 302Changing a wheel .......................... 304Characteristics .............................. 302Checking ........................................ 286Curb weight (definition) ................. 303

Definition of terms ......................... 302Direction of rotation ...................... 304Display message ............................ 225Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 304DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 302DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 301GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 302GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 302GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 302Important safety notes .................. 286Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 302Information on driving .................... 286Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 303Labeling (overview) ........................ 298Load bearing index (definition) ...... 303Load index ..................................... 301Load index (definition) ................... 303M+S tires ....................................... 288Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 303Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 303Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 303Maximum tire load ......................... 301Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 303MOExtended tires .......................... 288Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 303Overview ........................................ 286PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 303Replacing ....................................... 304Service life ..................................... 287Sidewall (definition) ....................... 303Speed rating (definition) ................ 302Storing ........................................... 304Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 302Summer tires ................................. 288Temperature .................................. 298

18 Index

TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 303Tire bead (definition) ...................... 303Tire pressure (definition) ................ 303Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 302Tire size (data) ............................... 308Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 299Tire tread ....................................... 287Tire tread (definition) ..................... 303Total load limit (definition) ............. 304Traction ......................................... 298Traction (definition) ....................... 303Tread wear ..................................... 297Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 297Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 302Wear indicator (definition) ............. 304Wheel and tire combination ........... 308Wheel rim (definition) .................... 302see Flat tire

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 283Important safety notes .................. 281

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 281Installing the towing eye ................ 282Removing the towing eye ............... 282Transporting the vehicle ................ 283With both axles on the ground ....... 282With the rear axle raised ................ 283

Traffic reportssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 240

Traffic Sign AssistDisplay message ............................ 220Function/notes ............................. 181Important safety notes .................. 182Instrument cluster display ............. 182

TransmissionSelector lever ................................ 133see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 134Transporting the vehicle .................. 283Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 192

Trip odometerCalling up ....................................... 192Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 193

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 83Important safety notes .................... 78Locking separately ........................... 82Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 82Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 80Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 80Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 79Overview .......................................... 78Power closing .................................. 78

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 228Opening dimensions ...................... 317

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 317Trunk partition

Display message ............................ 228General notes .................................. 89Installing .......................................... 90Opening/closing .............................. 89Removing ......................................... 90

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 216Switching on/off ........................... 106

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 310Installation ..................................... 310Transmission output (maximum) .... 310

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUmbrella holder ................................. 247Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 78From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 77

Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201

Index 19

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 245

VVehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 226Electronics ..................................... 310Equipment ....................................... 24Individual settings .......................... 198Limited Warranty ............................. 28Loading .......................................... 295Locking (in an emergency) ............... 78Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 71Lowering ........................................ 308Maintenance .................................... 25Parking for a long period ................ 147Pulling away ................................... 126Raising ........................................... 305Reporting problems ......................... 27Securing from rolling away ............ 305Tow-starting ................................... 281Towing away .................................. 281Transporting .................................. 283Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 78Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 71Vehicle data ................................... 317

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 317Vehicle dimensions ........................... 317Vehicle emergency locking ................ 78Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 311Vehicle level

Active Body Control (ABC) (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 166Active Body Control (ABC)(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 168Display message ............................ 219

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 271Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 195


VINSeat ............................................... 312Type plate ...................................... 311

Voice Control Systemsee Separate operating instructions

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 233Active Brake Assist ........................ 238Brake Assist ................................... 238Brakes ........................................... 232Check Engine ................................. 236Coolant .......................................... 236Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 238Distance warning ........................... 238ESP® .............................................. 233ESP® OFF ....................................... 234Fuel tank ........................................ 236General notes ................................ 231Parking brake ................................ 235PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 40Reserve fuel ................................... 236Restraint system ............................ 235Seat belt ........................................ 231SPORT handling mode ................... 235Tire pressure monitor .................... 239

Warranty .............................................. 24Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 229Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 308Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 308Wheel chock ...................................... 305Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 304Checking ........................................ 286Cleaning ......................................... 268Important safety notes .................. 286Information on driving .................... 286Interchanging/changing ................ 304Mounting a new wheel ................... 307Mounting a wheel .......................... 304Overview ........................................ 286Removing a wheel .......................... 307

20 Index

Storing ........................................... 304Tightening torque ........................... 308Wheel size/tire size ....................... 308

Wind screenElectrical wind screen ...................... 91

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 118

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 264Important safety notes .................. 316

Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 229Problem (malfunction) ................... 112Replacing the wiper blades ............ 110Switching on/off ........................... 109

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 288Slippery road surfaces ................... 152Snow chains .................................. 288

Winter operationOverview ........................................ 288

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 288

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 269Important safety notes .................. 110Replacing ....................................... 110

Workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 118

Index 21

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-hensive and specifically adapted information onyour vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-ual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Press theØ button in the center console.The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item byturning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 241).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn3the controller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information texts or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select% sym-bol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem using the buttons on the centerconsole: press the$,%,Õ orØbutton.The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-ator's Manual remains open in the back-ground.

22 Digital Operator's Manual

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 23

Introductio

n

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 311).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-

tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to causedeath or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and you

24 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance Center3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty booklet(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-erature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell yourMercedes, please leave the entireliterature in the vehicle so that it is available tothe next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic converter.Rthe fuelmay have a considerably lower octanerating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-age.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 25

Introductio

n

Z

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

26 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again withan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-essary, contact us at one of the followingaddresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLC3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

Operating safety 27

Introductio

n

Z

The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/

content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rvehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assurance

28 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which acci-dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-dent location) are recorded. However, other par-ties, such as law enforcement could combineEDR data with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash investi-gation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by the EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

Data stored in the vehicle 29

Introductio

n

Z

Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

30 Information on copyrightIntroductio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 139

; Combination switch 106

= Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 99

? Horn

A Instrument cluster 32

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 170

C Overhead control panel 37

Function Page

D Climate control systems 113

E Ignition lock 124Start/Stop button 124

F Cruise control lever 153

G Electric parking brake 146

H Light switch 105

I Diagnostics connection 27

J Opens the hood 261

Cockpit 31

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Speedometer with segments 189Warning and indicator lamps:Electric parking brake (red) 235F USA only! Canada only! Electric parking brake(yellow) 235· Distance warning 238å ESP® OFF 233! ABS 233Brakes (red) 232$ USA onlyJ Canada onlyL Low-beam headlamps 106T Parking lamps 106K High-beam headlamps 106÷ ESP® 233

; #! Turn signals 106

= Multifunction display 191

? Tachometer 189

Function PageWarning and indicator lamps:M SPORT handling modein Mercedes-AMG vehicles 235R This lamp has no func-tionN This lamp has no func-tion; Check Engine 236h Tire pressure monitor 2396 Restraint system 39ü Seat belts 231

A Coolant temperature gauge 190Warning and indicator lamps:? Coolant 236

B Fuel level indicatorWarning and indicator lamps:8 Reserve fuel level withfuel filler flap location indica-tor (right) 236

C Instrument cluster lighting 189

Information on displaying the outside tempera-ture in the multifunction display can be foundunder "Outside temperature display"(Y page 189).

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 191

; Multimedia system display

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System8

MuteWX

Adjusts the volume~

Rejects or ends a call 195Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-ory

Function Page

? =;

Selects a menu 1909:

Selects a submenu or scrollsthrough lists 190a

Confirms a selection 190Hides display messages 204%

Back 190Switches off the Voice Con-trol System

i In vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: COMAND

; c Seat heating 97

= s Seat ventilation 98

? Ò AIRSCARF 98

A c PARKTRONIC 170

Function Page

B £ Hazard warning lamps 107

C 4 5 Indicator lamp 47

D å ESP® (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) 63è ECO start/stop button(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 127

i In vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

34 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 247Cup holder 250Ashtray 251

; COMAND controller

= Seat adjustment

? Favorites button

A Roof switch 88

B Opens/closes the side win-dows 85

C Extends/retracts the windscreen 91

D Stowage compartment withMedia InterfaceCigarette lighter 246

E Selects park position 133

F è start/stop button 127

Function Page

G Shows the driving conditionsmenu in the COMAND dis-play (vehicles with ActiveBody Control) 166

H É Adjusts the vehiclelevel (vehicles with ActiveBody Control) 166

I Adjusts the suspension set-tingsSets the suspension tuning(vehicles with Active BodyControl) 167

J Ú Selects the drive pro-gram/program selector but-ton 139

K Transmission positions 136

L Selector lever 133

Center console 35

Ataglance

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 247Cup holder 250Ashtray 251

; COMAND controller

= Seat adjustment

? Favorites button

A Roof switch 88

B Opens/closes the side win-dows 85

C Extends/retracts the windscreen 91

D Stowage compartment withMedia InterfaceCigarette lighter 246

Function Page

E Selects park position 133

F Drive program selector 132

G ß AMG button (drive pro-gram or calls up/stores sus-pension tuning) 132

H à Sets the suspensiontuning 132

I å ESP® 63

J Transmission positions 136

K Selector lever 133

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 108

; c Switches the interiorlighting on/off 108

= µ Operates MAGIC SKYCONTROL 91

? |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 108

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 108

Function Page

B ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 255

C G SOS button (mbracesystem) 253

D Rear-view mirror 102

E Buttons for the garage dooropener 259

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace system) 255

G Eyeglasses compartment 247

Overhead control panel 37

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 77

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 77

= Adjusts the seats 94

? r45=Stores seat, exterior mirrorand steering column adjust-ment settings 103w Adjusts the front-passenger seat from thedriver’s seat 96

Function Page

A o Opens/closes thetrunk lid 82

B 7Z\ Adjusts theexterior mirrors electrically 101

C W Opens/closes the sidewindows 83

38 Door control panelAt

aglance

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:Rseat belt systemRair bagsRchild restraint systemThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 42)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 94).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.

Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 94).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 44).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 51).For information on children traveling with you inthe vehicle and on child restraint systems, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54).


G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary to modify components of therestraint system to accommodate a personwith disabilities, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:for further information contact our CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This can affectfor example the Emergency TensioningDevice or the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: andPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; arepart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the

event of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 46) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 54). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 46). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 40) and "Air bags"(Y page 44). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices and seat beltforce limiters

If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt guidequickly or with a jerky movement, the belt

40 Occupant safetySafety

retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags which absorb part of thedeceleration force. This can reduce the forceexerted on the vehicle occupants during an acci-dent.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannotwear the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional and suitable restraint system. If theseat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-form its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 54) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 46)

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 41).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the beltbuckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.

Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or be routedunder your arm.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down aspossible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe thenotes in the "Stowage options/compartments"section for securing objects, luggage or loads(Y page 246).

Fastening seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 42).


Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 94).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat beltguide= and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 43).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

In order to attach the child restraint systemsecurely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the front-passenger seat is equipped with a special seatbelt retractor. Further information on the "Spe-cial seat belt retractor" (Y page 55).

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff in the on-board computer (Y page 201).

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until thedriver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 51).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.


G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the

door or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 40).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 46) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win-dows.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer


function correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. This could cause the systemto identify the seat as being occupied. In theevent of an accident, the restraint systems onthe front-passenger side may be triggeredand have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the driver's and front-passenger seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about

the status of the front-passenger air bag(Y page 40).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 46). ThePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit(Y page 47)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn and front-passenger knee bag; underthe glove box. The driver's and front-passengerknee bags are triggered together with the frontair bags.The driver's and front-passenger knee bagsoffer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-tection.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the operation ofthe occupant classification system (OCS)could be adversely affected. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags: deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys under the following conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Head bags

Head bags: deploy in the area of the side win-dows at the front.

When deployed, the head bag enhances thelevel of protection for the head. However, it doesnot protect the:RchestRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the head bag isdeployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a head bag may be deployed in otheraccident situations (Y page 51).The head bag on the front-passenger side doesnot deploy under the following conditions:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the head bag on the front-passenger sidedeploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag and front-passenger knee bag areeither enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe front-passenger head bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible


If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If you install a child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, be sure to observe thecorrect positioning of the child restraint system.Never place objects under or behind the childrestraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully retract theseat cushion length. The entire base of the childrestraint system must always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat. The back-rest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrestof the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, orturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul-taneously for approximately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in theevent of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bagchangeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bagdisplaymessage appears in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 214). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the statusof the front-passenger front air bag both beforeand during the journey.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more informationon OCS under "Problems with the OccupantClassification System" (Y page 50).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt guide to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system. The shoul-der belt strap must be routed forwards anddownwards from the belt guide. Alwaysobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test and

remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelvemonths old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up perma-nently after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated. The result of the classification isdependent on, among other factors, the childrestraint systemand the child's stature.Makesure that the conditions for a correct classi-fication are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is still lit, do not install achild restraint system on the front-passengerseat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAGON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up and remains lit after the systemself-test depending on the result of the clas-sification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of adult stature, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 54).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in thiscase and does not deploy during an accident.Have the system checked by qualified techni-cians as soon as possible. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger


seat should only be repaired at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion is damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-

board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 47).For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 50).

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 49).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 46).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/orthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Roll bar

G DANGERIf the roll bar has developed a malfunction, itmay not function, e.g. in the event of an acci-dent. The roll bars may then not protect thevehicle occupants as intended. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have roll bars checked immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you place objects or clothing on the roll barcovers, these could impair roll bar extension.The roll bars may then not protect the vehicleoccupants as intended. In addition, objectscould endanger the vehicle occupants whenthe roll bar is extending. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.


Ensure that the movement area of the roll barcovers is kept clear. Always stow all objects inthe vehicle correctly.

The roll bars are located in the rear area of thevehicle under the two outer rear compartmenttrim covers.They extend if systems detect that the vehicle isin danger of rollover. The two outer rear com-partment trim covers are opened and the rollbars are extended within fractions of a second.Once the roll bars are extended, you can no lon-ger lower them. An open roof can no longer beclosed. In this case, visit the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags


G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

For your own safety and that of your frontpassenger, it is important that you havedeployed air bags replaced and faulty air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGEmergency Tensioning Devices that havedeployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have pyrotechnically triggered EmergencyTensioning Devices replaced immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 39)Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckleof the respective seat

If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-passenger knee bags

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG indicator lamps (Y page 40).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.

The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the control unit of the restraint systemdetectsa side impact or a vehicle rollover, the relevantcomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted separately depending on the anticipatedtype of accident.RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,independently of the Emergency TensioningDevice and the use of the seat belt on thedriver's seatThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RHead bag on the side of impact, independ-ently of the use of the seat belt and inde-pendently of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRHead bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when thevehicle rolls over, if the system determinesthat deployment can offer additional protec-tion to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover


NECK-PRO head restraints


G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

Method of operationNECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likelihoodof head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards in theevent of a rear-end collision of a certain severity.This provides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been trig-gered in an accident, you must reset the NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger seat (Y page 53). Otherwise, theadditional protection will not be available in theevent of another rear-end collision. You can rec-ognize when NECK-PRO head restraints havebeen triggered by the fact that they have movedforwards and can no longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have theNECK-PRO head restraints checked for func-tionality at a qualified specialist workshop aftera rear-end collision.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints

Donot insert your finger between the upholsteryof the head restraint and the seat. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction of arrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow= untilthe cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have difficultyresetting theNECK-PRO head restraints, havethis work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)PRE-SAFE® informs you of certain critical drivingsituations and takes pre-emptive measures toprotect the vehicle occupants.PRE-SAFE® can take the following measuresindependently of each other:Rpre-tensioning the driver's and front-passenger seatbelt.Rclosing the side windows.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

Rsetting a more favorable seat position for thefront-passenger seat.Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: increasingthe air pressure in the side bolsters of the seatbackrest.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Should an accident not occur, the preventativemeasures taken are reversed. Certain settingsmust be made yourself.X If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,move the seat backrest back slightly.Seat belt pre-tensioning is released.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned about the interventionof PRE-SAFE® PLUS.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Active ParkingAssist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply thebrakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates anintention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesIf a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

54 Children in the vehicleSafety

The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 46)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting

properly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 42).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the seat beltguide.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Children in the vehicle 55

Safety

Z

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button, hold belt tonguefirmly and guide it back towards belt guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

Further information on stowing objects, luggageand loads securely can be found under “Stowingoptions/stowage compartments”(Y page 246).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systemof child restraint systems isthe seat belt system.If you install a child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinstructions and safety notes on the "OccupantClassification System (OCS)" (Y page 46). Thereyouwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

56 Children in the vehicleSafety

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesIf you install a child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always observe theinstructions and safety notes on the "OccupantClassification System (OCS)" (Y page 46).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 40) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible. Fully retract the seat cushionlength. The entire base of the child restraint sys-temmust always rest on the seat cushion of thefront-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap iscorrectly routed from the front-passenger seatbelt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the childrestraint system. The shoulder belt strap mustbe routed forwards and downwards from thefront-passenger seat belt guide. If necessary,adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly.

Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 58)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 58)RBrake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist(Y page 59)RActive Brake Assist (Y page 60)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 63)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 66)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 67)RActive Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist(Y page 67)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 69)

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

Z

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 286).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-

tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 233) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 205).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.


G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

58 Driving safety systemsSafety

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist

General informationBrake Assist with cross-traffic function can helpyou to minimize the risk of a collision with avehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects ofsuch a collision. If Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is onlyavailable in vehicles with the Driving Assistancepackage.For Brake Assist with cross-traffic function toassist youwhen driving, the radar sensor systemand the camera system must be operational.The sensor system and camera system helpBrake Assist with cross-traffic function detectobstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detectspedestrians using typical characteristics suchas body contours and the posture of a personstanding upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemismalfunctioning, Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction is restricted or no longer available. Thebrake system is still available with completebrake boosting effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 59).


G WARNINGBrake Assist with cross-traffic function can-not always clearly identify objects and com-plex traffic situations.In such cases, the Brake Assist with cross-traffic function might:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBrake Assist with cross-traffic function can-not always clearly identify people, particularlyif they are moving. Brake Assist with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in thesecases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGBrake Assist with cross-traffic function doesnot react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction may not intervene in all critical con-ditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sources


Safety

Z

Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly move into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, Brake Assist with cross-traffic function calculates the brake force nec-essary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBrake Assist with cross-traffic function hasdetected a risk of collision

When driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is acti-vated. The increase in brake pressure will becarried out at the last possible moment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionautomatically increases the brake pressure to adegree suited to the traffic situation.

Brake Assist with cross-traffic function providesbraking assistance in hazardous situations withvehicles in front within a speed range between4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion may react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which move inthe detection range of the sensors and arerecognized by them

i If Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionrequires a particularly high braking force, pre-ventative passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated at the same time(Y page 53).

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is deac-tivated and the brakes function as usual again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

Active Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-ing function with an autonomous braking func-tion and Adaptive Brake Assist.Active Brake Assist can help you tominimize therisk of a collision with the vehicle in front orreduce the effects of such a collision.If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. If you do not react to the visual andaudible collision warning, autonomous brakingcan be initiated in critical situations. If you applythe brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap-


tive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist sys-tem supports you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after servicing is carried outon the Active Brake Assist systemObserve the important safety notes in the"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 123).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivatingActive Brake Assist is automatically active afterswitching on the ignition.You can activate or deactivate Active BrakeAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 197). When deactivated, the distancewarning function and the autonomous brakingfunction are also deactivated.If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, theæsymbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-play.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 58).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning function warnsyou if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound, andthe· distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstacles


Safety

Z

that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, Active BrakeAssist can assist with the autonomous brakingfunction.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.The autonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously (Y page 53).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of

reacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 53).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesG WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.


Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Brake Assist to intervene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if theyspin. This enables you to pull away and acceler-ate on slippery surfaces, for example if the roadsurface is slippery on one side. In addition, moredrive torque is transferred to the wheel orwheels with traction.ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP®.

i Mercedes-AMGvehicles: your vehiclemaybe equipped with 20-inch tires on the rearaxle. After changing to 19 inch wheels, ETSmay intervene noticeably earlier during thefirst few kilometers. After approximately10 km ETS will function as usual again. Infor-mation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 308).


G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 283).If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, then ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the åESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 233) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 205).

i Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.


Safety

Z

The influence of drive programs on ESP®The drive programs allow ESP® to adapt to different weather conditions, road conditions and thedesired driving style. The drive programs can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT button(Y page 131) or on AMG vehicles using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 132).

Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics

C ComfortE Economy

ESP® on This drive program offers the best compromisebetween traction and stability.Select drive program E or C in difficult road con-ditions such as snow and ice or on wet roads.

S Sport ESP® on This drive program offers the best compromisebetween traction and stability.

S+ Sport Plus ESP® Sport The vehicle's own oversteering and understeer-ing characteristics are emphasized. This enablesa more active driving style.This drive program requires increased driverinteraction.Select this drive program only when road condi-tions are good, e.g. the roads are dry and theroute is clear.

Always adapt your driving style and drive program to the prevailing road and weather conditions.Additional information for drive programs (Y page 137).

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status, e.g. ifESP® was deactivated before the engine wasautomatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles)


You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelSpinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.


Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To deactivate: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RActive Brake Assist is not available and is notactivated even if you brake firmly with assis-tance from ESP®RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RActive Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assistis not available and is not activated even if youbrake firmly with assistance from ESP®RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP®(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)


You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when the vehi-cle's own oversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired

Spinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe-rienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.


Safety

Z

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode: brieflypress button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up. TheSPORT handling mode message appears inthe multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi-function display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP®ON message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and one ormore wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-ted degree.RTraction control is still activated.

REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RActive Brake Assist is not available and is notactivated even if you brake firmly with assis-tance from ESP®RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RActive Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assistis not available and is not activated even if youbrake firmly with assistance from ESP®RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 58).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.


Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 233) as well as displaymessages (Y page 207).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 58).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 163) and hill startassist (Y page 127).

Active Brake Assist with Cross-TrafficAssist

General informationActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncan help you to minimize the risk of a collisionwith a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reducethe effects of such a collision. If Active BrakeAssist with cross-traffic function has detected arisk of collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 58).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function isonly available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-tance Plus package.For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensorsystem and the camera system must be opera-tional.The radar sensor system and camera systemhelp Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion to detect obstacles that are in the path ofyour vehicle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functiondetects pedestrians using typical characteris-tics such as body contours and the posture of aperson standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 67).


G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionwill initially brake your vehicle by a partialapplication of the brakes if a danger of colli-sion is detected. There may be a collisionunless you brake yourself. Even after subse-quent full application of the brakes a collisioncannot always be avoided, particularly whenapproaching at too high a speed. There is arisk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncannot always clearly identify objects andcomplex traffic situations.In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function might:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be prepared to brake, especiallyif Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in anon-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncannot always clearly identify people, partic-ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assistwith cross-traffic function cannot intervene inthese cases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be prepared to brake, especiallyif Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion alerts you.


Safety

Z

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functiondoes not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionmay not intervene in all criticalsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of the

radar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-tivate Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 197).When Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the assistance graphic display ofthe multifunction display.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An intermittent warning tonewill then sound and the· distance warninglamp will light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functioncan also brake the vehicle automatically underthe following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seatbelts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction may react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 53).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.


You can prevent the intervention of Active BrakeAssist with cross-traffic function at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdownRRelease the brake pedal.The braking application of Active Brake Assistwith cross-traffic function is ended automati-cally if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheelin the direction required for vehicle stabilization.This steering assistance is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on awet or slippery road surface when you brakeRthe vehicle starts to skid


No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is deactivatedRESP® is malfunctioningRthe steering is faultyIf ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerX To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodRthe glove boxRthe stowage space under the armrestRa stowage compartment in the rear

Protection against theft 69

Safety

Z

X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection. The emergencycall system sends the message or data provi-ded that:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

70 Protection against theftSafety

SmartKey


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle; F Opens/closes the trunk lid= % Unlocks the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe glove boxRthe stowage compartment under the armrestRthe stowage compartment in the rear com-partmentRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 200).When it is dark, the surround lighting also comeson if it is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 199).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 126).

SmartKey 71

Openingandclosing

Z

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the key and the corresponding doorhandle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touched

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface:or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 85).

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the key. The SmartKey

will then use very little power, thereby conserv-ing battery power. For the purposes of activa-tion/deactivation, the vehicle must not benearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp (Y page 74) of theSmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights uponce, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means only the driver's door, the lock-able stowage compartments in the vehicle inte-rior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel alone.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor about six seconds until the battery indica-tor lamp (Y page 74) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the driver or front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

72 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold down the% and& buttons simul-taneously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp (Y page 74) flashestwice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 69).

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 78)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 83)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 78)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

SmartKey 73

Openingandclosing

Z

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 74).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 73).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing and then press toclose it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 73).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

74 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey


You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 74) and replace it if necessary(Y page 74).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 71).


If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 75

Openingandclosing

Z


The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 277).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 279).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.


If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

76 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside! The side windows will not open/close if thebattery is discharged or if the side windowshave iced up. It will then not be possible toclose the door. Do not attempt to force thedoor closed. You could otherwise damage thedoor or the side window.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle has previously been locked fromthe outside, opening a door from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 69).

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

When a door is opened, the side window on thatside opens slightly. When the door is closed, theside window closes again.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside. For example, you can unlock thefront-passenger door from the inside or lock thevehicle before you pull away.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-cle locks.

The central locking button does not lock orunlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage com-partments, such as the glove box.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

Automatic locking feature

Doors 77

Openingandclosing

Z

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using the on-board computer(Y page 200).

Power closingPower closing pulls the doors and trunk lid intotheir locks automatically even if they are onlypartly closed.X Power closing feature (doors): push thedoor past the first detent position into thelock.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the trunk lid: lightly pushthe trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunk lidclosed.

Unlocking/locking the driver's doorusing the mechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 69).

Trunk


G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

! Only close the trunk once the roof is loweredcompletely. Otherwise, you could damage theroof.If you close the trunk lid before the roof islowered completely, the loading aid switchlights up and a warning tone sounds.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 317).

78 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

With the roof open, you can use the loading aidto raise the folded roof in the trunk to makeloading easier (Y page 248). The trunk partitionopens automatically.You can unlock the trunk lid if the vehicle is sta-tionary and the roof is completely open orclosed.Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened/closed from outsideRopened and closed automatically from out-side (vehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature)Ropened and closed automatically from inside(vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture)Ropened, closed or stopped during operationwithout the use of your hands (vehicles withKEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS)Rlocked separatelyRopened with the emergency release buttonRunlocked with the mechanical keyYou should preferably place luggage or loads inthe trunk.

Trunk lid reversing featureThe trunk lid is equipped with an automaticreversing feature. It reacts if a solid objectobstructs or restricts the trunk lid during theclosing procedure. The trunk lid opens againautomatically. The automatic reversing functionis only an aid and is not a substitute for yourattentiveness to the trunk lid while it is closing.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not respond:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some-one being trapped in these situations in par-ticular. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.If the trunk partition was previously closed,the trunk partition opens and remains open.

With the roof open, you can use the loading aidto raise the folded roof in the trunk to makeloading easier (Y page 248). The trunk partitionthen opens automatically.

Closing

Trunk 79

Openingandclosing

Z

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X Lock the vehicle if necessary using the&button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk,it does not lock.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle



Opening automaticallyYou can automatically open the trunk lid usingthe trunk lid handle.X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.When the roof is open, the trunk partitioncloses automatically.If the trunk partition was closed, it opensautomatically and remains open.

Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid can also be opened auto-matically with the SmartKey.X Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the trunk lid opens.

Closing automatically

X Press and release closing button: on thetrunk lid.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's dooris closed you can simultaneously close the trunklid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO keymust be in the rear detection range of the vehi-cle.X Press locking button; in the trunk lid.The trunk partition, the loading aid and thetrunk lid are closed.

If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside thevehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehiclelocks.If a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is detected inthe trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it isclosed. It does not lock.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS


G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking move-ment within the detection range of sensors.

80 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,you can open or close the trunk lid or stop theprocedure without using your hands. This is use-ful if you have your hands full. To do this, makea kickingmovement under the bumperwith yourfoot.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the reardetection range of the vehicle.RWhen making the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clearanceto the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwiselose your balance, for example on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make a kickingmovement within the detection range of sen-sors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Other-wise, the sensors may not function correctly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.

RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-thetic leg may restrict functionality.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lidcould thus be opened or closed unintention-ally, for example, if you:- sit on the edge of the trunk.- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson in these situations or in situations sim-ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten-tional opening/closing of the trunk.

Operation

X To open/close: move your foot in sensordetection range: using your leg.A warning tonewill soundwhile the trunk lid isopening or closing.

X If the trunk lid does not open after severalattempts: wait at least ten seconds thenmove your leg under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the trunk lid does not open or close.Repeat the leg movement more quickly if thisoccurs.To stop the opening or closing procedure, youhave the following options:RKick with your foot in sensor detectionrange: under the bumper.RPull the handle on the outside of the trunk lid.RPress the closing button on the trunk lid.RPull or press the remote operating switch onthe driver's door.RPress theF button on the SmartKey.

Trunk 81

Openingandclosing

Z

If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stop-ped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will open

If the trunk lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will close

Opening/closing automatically frominside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. In addi-tion, people may be standing in the closingarea or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-dren, during the closing procedure. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Release the remote operating switch imme-diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-open the trunk lid, pull on the remote operat-ing switch.

G WARNINGThe trunk lid can be automatically opened orclosed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehi-cle. If children are left unsupervised in thevehicle, they could activate the functions.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.



Opening and closing

X To open: pull remote operating switch: forthe trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.If the trunk partition was closed, it opensautomatically and remains open.

X To close: press remote operating switch:for the trunk lid until the trunk lid is closed.When the roof is open, the trunk partitioncloses automatically.

You can open and close the trunk lid from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remainslocked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 73).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from posi-tion1 to position2.

82 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 69).X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 73).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-tion2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid han-dle.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

Emergency release for the trunkYou can unlock the trunk lid from the inside withthe emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened withthe trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-cle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does not unlockthe trunk lid if the battery is disconnected ordischarged.Trunk lid emergency release light:REmergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedREmergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

Side windows 83

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe front side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the upward movement of oneof the front side windows during the closingprocess, the side window opens again automat-ically. During the manual closing process, theside window only opens again automaticallyafter the corresponding switch is released. How-ever, the automatic reversing feature is only anaid and does not relieve you of the responsibilityof paying attention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dows

Opening and closing the side windowsin the frontThe switches for the side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch for

the front-passenger side window on the front-passenger door.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Left; RightX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press orpull the corresponding switch again.

You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until the driv-er's or front-passenger door is opened.

Opening/closing the rear side windowsX To open: open the front side window on thecorresponding side (Y page 84).

X Press the corresponding switch again andrelease.The corresponding rear side window opensfully.

X To stop the rear side windows: briefly pullthe corresponding switch up and release.

84 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

X To close: close the front side window on thecorresponding side (Y page 84).

X Pull the respective switch and hold it.The corresponding rear side window will con-tinue to close until you release the switch.

Opening and closing all side windows

Using the switch on the center console

G WARNINGWhile opening the sidewindows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch down to open theside window again.

You can use the switch on the center console toclose all side windows simultaneously.X Open the cover in the lower center console.The switch for all side windows is under thecover.

X To open all side windows: press button:to the point of resistance.

X To open all side windows fully: pressswitch: beyond the point of resistance.

X To close all side windows: pull switch:.All side windows begin the closing proceduresimultaneously. The rear side windows closeafter the front side windows.

If, after opening thewindows, you close one sidewindow using the switch in the door controlpanel:Rthe front side window closes first andRthen the corresponding rear side windowcloses.

Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO

G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-ing area when a side window is being closed.There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:X Release the recessed sensor surface on thedoor handle.

X Immediately pull and hold the door handleand keep the door handle pulled.The side windows open.

With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO keymust be outside the vehicle. All the doors mustbe closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Side windows 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 84).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 84).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above.

86 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.


A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Roof


G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

G WARNINGClosing the roof manually is a complicatedand technically demanding procedure, whichrequires a lot of strength. You or others canbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Only have the soft top closed manually at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Never sit on the rear compartment trim orstow heavy objects there. You will otherwisedamage the roof and rear compartment trimof the vehicle.

! Do not forget that the weather can changeabruptly. Make certain that the roof is closedwhen you leave the vehicle. The vehicle elec-tronics can be damaged if water enters thevehicle interior.

! When opening and closing the roof, makesure that:Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roofswings upwards.Rthere is sufficient clearance behind thevehicle, as the trunk lid swings backwardsbeyond the bumper.Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunkpartition.Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by theload.

Roof 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Rthe trunk partition is closed.Rthe trunk lid is closed.Rthe outside temperature is above 5 ‡(Ò15 †).

You could otherwise damage the roof, trunkand other parts of the vehicle.

The vehicle dimensions for opening/closing theroof can be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 317).Make sure that the roof and rear window areclean and dry before opening the roof. Other-wise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle inte-rior or trunk.

Opening and closing using the roofswitch


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roof, body partscould be trapped by, for example, the roofmechanism, trunk lid or side windows. Thereis a risk of injury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no body parts are in the vicinity of movingcomponents. If someone becomes trapped,release the button.

For safety reasons, the roof can only be openedor closed when the vehicle is stationary.

! Operating the roof while pulling away:RObserve the following traffic carefully.RDo not drive faster than 25mph (40 km/h).RAvoid abrupt braking and swerving maneu-vers.

Do not operate the roof when cornering, driv-ing on uneven surfaces or during strongwinds. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-aged.

i If the traffic conditions mean that you haveto drive off while opening/closing the roof,the procedure which was started while sta-tionary can be continued at speeds of up toapprox. 25 mph (40 km/h).

Opening and closing

X Close the trunk lid (Y page 78).If the trunk is loaded correctly, the trunk par-tition is automatically closed.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console.Roof switch: is located under the cover.

X To open: pull roof switch: until the entireroof is stowed away in the trunk.You see the Vario-Roof in Operationmessage in the multifunction display. Oncethe opening procedure is complete, the mes-sage disappears and a tone will sound.All of the side windows open.

X To close: press and hold soft-top switch:until the soft top is fully closed.You see the Vario-Roof in Operationmessage in the multifunction display. Oncethe opening procedure is complete, the mes-sage disappears and a tone will sound.All of the side windows open.

X To close all side windows, pull the switchunder the cover of the center console(Y page 85).

Opening/closing using the SmartKey


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roof, body partscould be trapped by, for example, the roofmechanism, trunk lid or side windows. Thereis a risk of injury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no body parts are in the vicinity of moving

88 RoofOp

eningandclosing

components. If someone becomes trapped,release the button.

Opening and closingThis function is only available on vehicles withKEYLESS-GO or with roof comfort operation.X Close the trunk lid (Y page 78).If the trunk has been correctly loaded, thetrunk partition is automatically closed.

X Vehicles with comfort operation: point thetip of the SmartKey at the driver's door han-dle.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKeymust be within 6 ft (2 m) of the vehicle.

X To open: press and hold the% button onthe SmartKey until the roof is fully opened.The roof and the rear side windows open. Thefront side windows close.

X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.

X To open the front side windows: press the% button on the SmartKey again.

X To close: press and hold the& button onthe SmartKey until the roof is fully closed.The roof and the side windows close.

X To interrupt the closing procedure: releasethe& button.

Locking the roof again


G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

The roof is not locked if:RtheK symbol and the Vario-Roof inOperationmessage appear in the multifunc-tion displayRtheK symbol and the Open/CloseVario-Roof Completelymessage appear in

themultifunction display and you hear awarn-ing toneRyou hear a warning tone for up to ten secondswhen pulling away or while driving

LockingYou can lock the roof again if it is not lockedfully.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Press the roof switch (Y page 88).

Trunk partition

General notes! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage whenfolding back the roof, you should:Ronly load the trunk to below the trunk par-titionRnot place any objects on or in front of thetrunk partitionRnot place any objects on the cover behindthe roll barsRnot allow the cargo to push the trunk par-tition upwards

! Make sure the trunk separator is completelyclosed. Otherwise, the roof can be blockedwhen it is opened or closed.

The trunk partition can be used to cover luggageand loads in the trunk.

Opening and closing

Roof 89

Openingandclosing

Z

Trunk partition: can be opened and closedusing button;, e.g. to check correct loading.X To open: press button;.X To close: press button;.If the trunk is loaded correctly, trunk parti-tion: is automatically closed to the stop.

When the trunk lid is opened, trunk partition:opens automatically.

Removing and installing

X To remove: close trunk partition:(Y page 89).

X To disconnect the electric plug connector,press the release catch on connector; andremove connector;.

X Unhook net= from holders? on both sidesand guide it to the rear until it is completelyrolled up.

X Turn catch leverA downwards in the direc-tion of the arrow on both sides.Trunk partition: is unlocked.

X Slide trunk partition cover: forwards.X Pull trunk partition: out of the two guides inthe direction of arrowB.

X To install: insert trunk partition: into thetwo guides in the direction of arrowC to thestop.

X Turn catch leverA upwards in the directionof the arrow on both sides.Trunk partition: is unlocked.

X Pull the net forwards and hook into the retain-ers on both sides.

X Push trunk partition cover: back againstthe spring pressure and insert to the end stopon both sides.

90 RoofOp

eningandclosing

X Reconnect connector; of the electric plugconnector.

Wind screen

Electric wind screen

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf you use the wind screen in darkness or inother conditions offering poor visibility, yourview to the rear is further impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Only use the wind screen when visibility con-ditions are good.

! When extending or retracting the windscreen, make sure there are no objects on therear compartment trim. Otherwise, theobjects could damage the wind screen.

The wind screen offers protection from the windwhen driving with the roof down. The roof mustbe fully open before the wind screen can beextended.

Extending and retractingX Open the roof (Y page 87).X Open the cover in the lower center console.The switch for the electrical wind screen isunder the cover.

X To extend: press button:.X To retract: press button: again.

Roller sunblind for the panorama roof

The roller sunblind protects you from excessiveglare and heat caused by the sun shiningthrough the panorama glass roof.X To close: pull the roller sunblind in the direc-tion of the arrow using handle:.

X To open: slide the roller sunblind in the oppo-site direction to the arrow using handle:.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, thetransparency of which can be changed by apply-ing electrical voltage.MAGIC SKYCONTROL can be switched betweendarkened and transparent states.MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automaticallyafter a short period when you turn the SmartKeyto position 0 or remove the SmartKey.

Roof 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Risk of electric shock

G DANGERMAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using highvoltage. If the trim behind the overhead con-trol panel is damaged or removed, electricalcomponents will be exposed. If you touchthese components, you could get an electricshock. There is a risk of fatal injury.RNever remove the trim behind the overheadcontrol panel.RIf the trim is damaged, never touch theelectrical components behind it.RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-TROL carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The electrical components of MAGIC SKY CON-TROL are protected by a paneling behind theoverhead control panel.The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit ismarked with a yellowwarning sticker that warnsyou of high voltage. The electric cables of thehigh-voltage section are color orange.

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the statusit was set to before the engine was switchedoff.

X To change the degree of transparency:press button:.

At temperatures below freezing, the change isslower and uneven. The entire processmay takesome time.

92 RoofOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the roof


The roof will not open orclose.

The trunk partition is not closed.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).

The net on the trunk partition is not attached.X Attach the net (Y page 89).

The electrical plug connector on the trunk partition is disconnected.X Connect the electrical plug connector to the trunk partition(Y page 89).

The trunk is incorrectly loaded.X Only load the trunk to below the trunk partition

The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid (Y page 79).

The on-board voltage is too low.X Leave the engine running.

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roofdrive has switched off automatically.You can open and close the roof again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

The automatic roof system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Roof 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 94).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted properly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 95)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjustedproperly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the back of

your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety notes on steering columnadjustment (Y page 99).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjustedproperly.Adjusts the steering wheel electrically(Y page 99)

When adjusting the steering wheel column,make sure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 41).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 42).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirrorand the exterior mirrors (Y page 101) in sucha way that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions.

X Store the seat, steering wheel and exteriormirror settings using the memory function(Y page 103).

Seats


G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

94 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 44) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 54).

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints cannot be removed.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat cushion lengthA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentB Backrest angle

Seats 95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

i Further related subjects:RYou can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 103).RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfavora-ble position (Y page 53).

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the driver’s seat

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fullyforwards if there are objects in the parcel netin the front-passenger footwell. The objectscould otherwise be damaged.

You can use the seat switches on the driver'sside to adjust the front-passenger seat.X To activate/deactivate: press button:.When the indicator lamp in button: lights up,for the front-passenger seat you can:Rseat adjustmentRcall up the memory function

Removing the seat belt from the beltguide

G WARNINGWhen driving off-road, your body is subject toforces from all directions, due to the unevensurface. You could be thrown from your seat,for instance. There is a risk of injury.Alwayswear a seat belt, evenwhendriving off-road.

Both the driver's seat belt and the front-passenger seat belt can be removed from theseat belt guide. This makes it easier to move theseats forward.Before you drive off, the seat belt must be inser-ted into the seat belt guide.Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 41).X To remove: open up magnetic head; andfold the tab up in the direction of the arrow.

X Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide:.X To insert: fold the tab up in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Insert the seat belt back into the seat beltguide and fold the tab back down.

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.


gwheelandmirrors

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for the head restraint adjust-ment: up or down in the direction of thearrow.

Moving the seats forward/back

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! Make sure that there are no containers inthe cup holder and no objects in the footwellor behind the seats when adjusting the seats.Otherwise, you could damage the seats andthe objects.

You canmove the seat forwards, in order to gainbetter access to the rear compartment, e.g. toreach the stowage compartment in the rear .X Remove the seat belt from the seat belt guide(Y page 96).

X To move the seat forwards: press: onswitch:.The seatmoves automatically to the foremostposition.

X To move the seat backwards: press9on switch:.The seat moves back to the previous position.

X To stop seat movement: press: or9 in the opposite direction.

Adjusting the multicontour seatYou can set the multicontour seat usingCOMAND .

Adjusting the active multicontourseatYou can set the active the active multicontourseat using COMAND .

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the 4-way lumbar support usingCOMAND .

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seatThe three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched off prematurelyor cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electri-cal system voltage is too low because too manyelectrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear window defrosteror interior lighting.

X Once the battery is sufficiently charged,switch on the seat heating again.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.


i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i If you open the roof using the SmartKey(Y page 89), the driver's seat ventilation isautomatically switched on and the side win-dows open.

Problems with the seat ventilationThe seat ventilation has switched off prema-turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle'selectrical system voltage is too low because toomany electrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear window defrosteror interior lighting.

X Once the battery is sufficiently charged,switch on the seat heating again.

AIRSCARF

Switching on/off

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head andneck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.The warm air flows out of the holes in the headrestraints.The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.


gwheelandmirrors


X To switch on: press button:.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until the desiredheating level is set.


i The blower continues running for seven sec-onds to cool down the heating elements.

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARFmay switch off.

Steering wheel


G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: Adjusts the steering wheel height; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 99)RStoring settings (Y page 103)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.

Steering wheel 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRpress one of the memory function memorybuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving


G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself tofall.

There is a risk of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-ble ladder.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer(Y page 200).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards when you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO inposition 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is inposition 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper end stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with the igni-tion switched on, the steering wheel is alsoautomatically moved to the previously set posi-tion.The last position of the steering wheel is storedwhen you switch off the ignition or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 103).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwardswhen the driver's door is opened.This occurs irrespective of the position of theSmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 200).

100 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button: for the left exterior mirror orbutton; for the right exterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-ton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selectedmirror using

adjustment button= as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, to theright or to the left.The exterior mirror must be set to a positionthat provides you with a good overview oftraffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outside tem-perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Move the exterior mirror into the correct posi-tion manually.The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 101).

Mirrors 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions are met simul-taneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

You can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM?. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged during the process.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory button

102 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

You can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. This setting can be stored usingmemory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. In theexterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curbshould be visible.

X Press memory button M? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= within threeseconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-ting

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignitionlock.With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides

Memory function 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 95).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 99) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 101).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheeland exteriormirrors are in the stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted as soonas you release the storage position button.

104 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. In some countries,operation of the headlamps varies due to legalrequirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 106)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 199)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lightsetting is automatically selected according tothe brightness of the ambient light (exception:poor visibility due to weather conditions such asfog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-matically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have activatedthe daytime running lamps function via theon-board computer, the daytime runninglamps or the parking lamps and the low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automati-cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:turn the light switch toÃ.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-ning lamps function is required by law in Can-ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to T, the daytime running lampsand parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings take prec-edence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:

Exterior lighting 105

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. To do this, thedaytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 199).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and suffi-ciently lit according to legal standards. Avoidusing the parking lamps T over a period ofseveral hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.The green T indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side ofthe vehicle) or X (right-hand side of thevehicle).

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the light switch to L orÃ.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theÃ position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

106 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, onlythe turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. The corneringlight function can only be activated when thelow-beam headlamps are switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.Cornering light function with traffic circlefunction:The cornering light function is activated on bothsides before entering a traffic circle through anevaluation of the current GPS position of thevehicle. It remains active until after the vehiclehas left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrianscrossing the road, for example, are illuminatedby your vehicle in good time.

Active light functionThe active light function is a system that movesthe headlamps according to the steering move-ments of the front wheels. In this way, relevantareas remain illuminated while driving. Thisallows you to identify pedestrians, cyclists andanimals.Active: when the lights are switched on.Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the activelight function evaluates the course of the lane inwhich you are driving and pre-emptively con-trols the active light function.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.

Exterior lighting 107


Z


G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierOn very rare occasions, Adaptive HighbeamAssist may fail to recognize other road usersthat have lights, or may recognize them toolate. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-tivated orwill be activated regardless. There isa risk of an accident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up when it is dark and the lightsensor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road usershave been detected or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-cator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off; c Switches the interior lighting on= | Switches the interior lighting/auto-

matic interior lighting control off? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp

on/offA Switches the automatic interior lighting con-

trol on

108 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.The color and brightness of the ambient lightingare set using the multimedia system(Y page 199).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to center posi-tionA.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. You can activate this delayed switch-offusing the on-board computer (Y page 200).

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear lamps of your vehicle areequipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace thebulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-

lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-

shield using washer fluidIf the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Windshield wipers 109


Z

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiper armsvertically before folding them away from thewindshield. By doing so, you will avoid dam-age to the hood.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Moving the wiper arm to a vertical posi-tionOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Set the windshield wiper to position °.X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-cal position, turn the SmartKey to position 0and remove it from the ignition lock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshielduntil it engages.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set thewindshield wiper to the° position.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached a verticalposition, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshielduntil it engages.

Removing a wiper blade

X To bring the wiper blade into position tobe removed: hold the wiper arm firmly withone hand. With the other hand, turn the wiperblade in the direction of arrow= beyond thepoint of resistance.The wiper blade engages in the removal posi-tion with an audible click.

X To remove a wiper blade: firmly pressrelease knob; and pull the wiper bladeupwards:.

Installing the wiper blades

110 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Push the new wiper blade in the direction ofarrow: onto the wiper arm until lug;engages.

X Push the wiper blade out of the removal posi-tion in the direction of arrow= beyond thepoint of resistance.The wiper blade disengages with an audibleclick and is freely movable again.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Windshield wipers 111


Z

Problems with the windshield wipers


The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

112 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated when theengine is running. Optimum operation is onlyachievedwith the side windows and roof closed.

i When the weather is warm, ventilate thevehicle for a brief period. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired vehicleinterior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i It is possible that the dehumidification func-tion of the climate control system may beactivated automatically an hour after theSmartKey has been removed. The vehicle isthen ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-conditioning system.

Overview of climate control systems 113

Climatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117); Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)? Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 120)A Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)B Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)D Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)E Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)F Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)G Sets the airflow (Y page 118)H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 117)I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)

114 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117); Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)? Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 119)A Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)B Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)D Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)E Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)F Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)G Sets the airflow (Y page 118)H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 117)I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli-mate control

Climate control systemThe following contains instructions and recom-mendations to enable you to get the most out ofyour 3-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theÃ and¿ buttons on the control panel of the cli-mate control. The indicator lamps in theÃand¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, theñ button on theclimate control panel may be used to addi-tionally adjust the airflow (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommen-ded.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-ature settings on the driver's side for thefront-passenger side as well. The indicatorlamp in theá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you want toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior when theignition is switched off. The residual heatfunction can only be activated or deactivatedwith the ignition switched off.RVehicles with COMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, the

Overview of climate control systems 115

Climatecontrol

climate status display appears for three sec-onds at the bottom of the screen in theCOMAND display. You will see the currentsettings of the various climate control func-tions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require full climate control capacity,the ECO start/stop function can be deactivatedby pressing the ECO button (Y page 128).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only briefly

i Activate climate control primarily using theÃ button (Y page 117).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X To activate: press theÃ button.The indicator lamp in theÃ button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-matic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will alsonot be dehumidified. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, deactivate the coolingwith air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis only available when the engine is running. Theair inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidifiedaccording to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ orÁ button.To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁ buttonlights up.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ orÁ but-ton.To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁ buttongoes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function has a delayed switch-off fea-ture.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

116 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function


The indicator lamp in the¿ button flashesthree times or remainsoff. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" func-tion cannot be switchedon.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The automatic mode functions optimally whenthe "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehu-midification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will alsonot be dehumidified. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, deactivate the coolingwith air-dehumidification function only briefly.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theÃ button.The indicator lamp in theÃ button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airflow areactivated.i When automatic mode is enabled, the cli-mate mode can be selected (Y page 117).

X To switch to manual mode: press the_button.

orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theÃ button goesout.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsYou can select the following climate mode set-tings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Press theÃ button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until thedesired climate mode appears in the display.

Setting the temperature

Activating/deactivatingDifferent temperatures can be set for the driv-er's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Turn control: or; counter-clockwise orclockwise.Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).i If you turn controls: and; counter-clockwise to the lowest temperature setting,air-recirculation mode may switch on auto-matically, depending on the outside temper-ature.

Operating the climate control systems 117

Climatecontrol

Setting the air distribution


X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Air distribution settingsThe following air distribution settings can beselected:P Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the defroster,

center and side air vents (Canada only)a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Directs the airflow through the defroster

vents, the center and side air vents aswell as the footwell air vents (Canadaonly)

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the side airvents. The side air vents can only be closedwhen the adjuster in the side air vent is turnedclockwise.

Setting the airflow


X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup. The temperature setting for the driver's

side is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

X To switch off: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout. The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Defrosts the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the windshieldand the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "windshield defrosting"function on or offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X To switch on: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To switch off: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theÃ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn temperature control: orD counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 114).

orX Press theK orI button.


MAX COOL maximum coolingTheMAX COOL function is only available in vehi-cles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when the engineis running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Thepreviously selected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate controlswitches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with air dehumidi-fication function.

X Activate theÃ mode button.X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the display.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.


X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 119

Climatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster


The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesIf you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X To switch on: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.i Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti-vated at high levels of pollution or at high out-side temperatures. When air-recirculationmode is activated automatically, the indicatorlamp in theg button is not lit. Outside airis added after about 30 minutes.

X To switch off: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switches the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only available onvehicles for Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating the stationaryvehicle for up to 30 minutesafter the engine hasbeen switched off. The heating time depends onthe set interior temperature.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 124).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.i The blowerwill run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated. The blower runs at medium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops


Setting the air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.


In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in theengine compartment on the front-passengerside free of blockages, such as ice, snow orleaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the air ventsvertically or horizontally to set the direction ofthe airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vents: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: counter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vents: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: clock-wise until it engages.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster inthe side air vent; to the left.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster inthe side air vent; to the right until itengages.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-

Setting the air vents 121

Climatecontrol

Z

ture-sensitive items stored in the glove boxcould be damaged.

: Air vent control; Air ventWhen the climate control system is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instance tocool its contents. The level of airflow depends onthe airflow and air distribution settings.X To open or close: turn thumbwheel: to theright or left.

Setting the blower output of the AIR-SCARF vents


You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARFvents: using the AIRSCARF button(Y page 98).

122 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the red areaof the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),drive in program C.RChange gear in good time.After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Self-locking rear axle differential(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-ferential on the rear axle.Change the oil to improve protection of the rearaxle differential:Rafter a breaking-in period of 2000miles (USA)Rafter a breaking-in period of 3000 km (Can-ada)Revery 30,000 miles or 3 years (USA)Revery 60,000 km or 4 years (Canada)These oil changes prolong the service life of thedifferential. Have the oil change carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving



G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only available

Driving 123

Drivingandparking

Z

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with aSmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GOstart function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in

124 DrivingDrivingandparking

the vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 71).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can impair the functionality of the KEY-LESS-GO key.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations where anindicator lamp either fails to go out after startingthe engine or lights up while driving(Y page 232).

If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position, the ignition is switched offagain.

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the SmartKey.X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Driving 125

Drivingandparking

Z

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

The catalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of theengine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKey insteadof KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button outof the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock (Ypage124) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineThe Start/Stop button can be used to start thevehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and theSmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode forstarting the engine operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-tion.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 124).The engine starts.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 200).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. Only then is the shift lockreleased.


i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 147).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you switch on the engine using the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, theèECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-play.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction is only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is stopped automatically.

Driving 127

Drivingandparking

Z

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): automatic engine switch-off can takeplace a maximum of four times in a row (initialstop, then three subsequent stops).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-ted.The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. It isthen not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase. Whenyou depress the accelerator pedal, the enginestarts automatically and the braking effect ofthe HOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of position PRyou switch to drive program S+Ryou switch to drive program S or M(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to position P does notstart the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive programC, press ECObutton:.

orX Switch to drive program S, S+ or M(Y page 132).Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.


If drive program S, S+ orM is active, the auto-matic transmission switches to drive programC.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.

Driving 129

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 163) or Distance PilotDISTRONIC (Y page 160).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 125). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 279).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the startermotor to cool down for approximately twominutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.



The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).The coolant warninglamp may also be on anda warning tone maysound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 263). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fanmay be faulty. Thecoolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehiclesexcept Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive programselected the following vehicle characteristicswill change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe curve tilting function (vehicles with ActiveBody Control)Rthe control thresholds of ESP®Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 125).

X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: as manytimes as necessary until the desired driveprogram is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After a short time thedisplay goes out and the status icon of theselected drive program appears.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed briefly in themultimedia systemdisplay.i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-tion is deactivated at the factory due to theavailable fuel grade. In this case, the ECOstart/stop function is not available in anydrive program, regardless of the display in themultimedia system display.

Available drive programs:

C Comfort Comfortable and economi-cal driving characteristics

S Sport Sporty driving characteris-tics

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics

I Individual Individual settings

DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 131

Drivingandparking

Z

E Economy(vehicles withadjustabledamping)

Particularly economicaldriving characteristics

CV CURVE(vehicles withActive BodyControl)

Particularly economicaldriving characteristics withcornering function

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 137).

DYNAMIC SELECT controller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

General informationSelect the drive program using the DYNAMICSELECT controller.Available drive programs:

I Individual Individual settings

C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-mum-economy engine andtransmission settings

S Sport Sporty engine and trans-mission settings

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-mission settings

Race Maximum sportiness andengine and transmissionsettings suitable for theracetrack

Depending on the drive program selected thefollowing vehicle characteristics will change:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission managementRESP®Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver assistance systemsRthe availability of gliding modeFurther information for automatic drive programcharacteristics (Y page 137).

Additionally, in drive program I you can config-ure the respective vehicle characteristics usingthe multimedia system. You can find informa-tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 125).

Selecting the drive program

X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller: asmanytimes as necessary until the desired driveprogram is selected.The status icon of the selected drive programis shown in the multifunction display.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed briefly in themultimedia systemdisplay.The drive program indicator on DYNAMICSELECT controller: lights up in red.

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 137).

132 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Drivingandparking

Additional settings

: ECO start/stop function (Y page 127); ESP® (Y page 63)= Suspension (Y page 169)? Permanent activation ofmanual gearshifting

(Y page 139)When you press buttons: -? the corre-sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMICSELECT controller setting is overwritten.These settings will also be maintained if youchange with the DYNAMIC SELECT controller indrive program RACE, S+, S or C.If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-acteristics will be accepted. This is also the caseif you have previously pressed buttons: -?.

Automatic transmission


G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-cle is rolling, do not shift the transmissiondirectly from D to R, from R to D or directly toP.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is inmotion. At low speeds in transmissionposition D or R, park position P is otherwiseengaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

j Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe selector lever always returns to its originalposition. The current transmission position P, R,N or D appears in the transmission position dis-play in the multifunction display.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-cle is rolling, do not shift the transmissiondirectly from D to R, from R to D or directly toP.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is inmotion. At low speeds in transmissionposition D or R, park position P is otherwiseengaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

Automatic transmission 133

Drivingandparking

Z

j Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe selector lever always returns to its originalposition. The current transmission position P, R,N or D appears in the transmission position dis-play in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display


: Transmission position; Gear= Drive programThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.


: Transmission position; Drive program

The current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.In addition to drive program; being shown inthe multifunction display, the currently selecteddrive program is indicated in red on theDYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 132).

Engaging park position P


X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Press button:.



X Press button:.

134 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or Distance PilotDISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa-tion on the HOLD function (Y page 164) and onDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 158).

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X Depress the brake and keep it pressed.X Push the selector lever forwards past the firstpoint of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-tion on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 127).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.


X Push the selector lever forwards or back tothe first point of resistance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.WithKEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the automatic trans-mission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the selector lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.


Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from rollingaway when stopped.Only shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 133). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to the park-ing lock in order to secure the vehi-cle.If the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock, the transmission islocked.The automatic transmission shiftsinto P automatically:Rwhen the SmartKey is removedfrom the ignition lockRwhen the engine is switched offwith the transmission in position Ror D and one of the doors isopened

If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brake pedal will allowyou tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission only to position N ifthe vehicle is in danger of skidding,e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts


KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Drive programs

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Rlow fuel consumption resulting from the auto-matic transmission shifting up sooner. Thevehicle is driven in the lowengine speed rangeand the wheels are less likely to spin.Rthe suspension exhibits comfortable dampingsettings.Rthe steering exhibits a comfortable steeringcurve.RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).

i Select this drive program for difficult roadconditions, e.g. snow and ice or wet road sur-faces.

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-istics.Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits firm damping set-tings.

Rthe steering exhibits a sporty steering curve.RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics.Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firmdamping settings (vehicles with adaptiveadjustable damping).Rthe suspension exhibits firm damping set-tings (vehicles with Active Body Control).Rthe steering exhibits a sporty steering curve.RESP® emphasizes the vehicle's own over-steering and understeering characteristics.This enables a more active driving style. Thisdrive program requires increased driver inter-action. For further information about ESP®,see (Y page 63).

i Only select this drive program if the roadconditions are good, e.g. the road is dry andthe route ahead is clearly visible.

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties of thedrive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe control thresholds of ESP®Information about configuring drive program Iwith the multimedia system can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.


Drivingandparking

Z

Vehicles with adaptive adjustable damp-ing: drive program E (Economy)Drive program E is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.The vehicle is driven in the low engine speedrange and the wheels are less likely to spin.Rthe suspension exhibits comfortable dampingsettings.Rthe steering exhibits a comfortable steeringcurve.Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnec-ted from the drive train. The vehicle useskinetic energy and consumes less fuel (coast-ing mode).RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).

Vehicles with Active Body Control: driveprogram CURVECURVE drive program is characterized by thefollowing:Rincreased driving comfort on bends.Rthe vehicle tilts actively into the bend. Furtherinformation on the cornering function(Y page 167).Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Rcomfortable suspension setting.Rthe steering exhibits a comfortable steeringcurve.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnec-ted from the drive train. The vehicle uses

kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (coast-ing mode).RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).


RACE drive programThe RACE drive program is characterized by thefollowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristicssuitable for the racetrack.Rall vehicle systems are set for maximumsportiness.Rthe gearshift recommendation gives youinformation for slowly warming up the driveassemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficientdriving style (Y page 139). You can follow thegearshift recommendations at all times andshift gear accordingly using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. On the basis of thegearshift recommendation, using the steeringwheel paddle shifters, you can optimize thedrive train and engine operating mode at anytime.Rif you have selected a gear manually, this willbe maintained until the vehicle speed increa-ses or decreases dramatically.Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firmdamping settings.Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.RESP® switches to SPORT handling mode. TheM SPORT handling mode warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up. The SPORThandling modemessage appears in the mul-tifunction display. Observe the importantsafety notes for the SPORT handling mode(Y page 65).RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-ted degree. The engine's torque is onlyrestricted to a limited degree and the drivewheels can spin. For further informationabout ESP®, see (Y page 65).


Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics.Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firmdamping settings.Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-istics.Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firmdamping settings.Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, forexample on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.The vehicle is driven in the low engine speedrange and the wheels are less likely to spin.

Rgliding mode is available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.RESP® provides the optimum compromisebetween traction and stability. For furtherinformation about ESP®, see (Y page 63).

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties of thedrive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission managementRESP®Rthe suspensionInformation about configuring drive program Iwith the multimedia system can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.

i To permanently select the gears in driveprogram I using the steering wheel paddleshifters, select theM (manual) setting for thetransmission.

Manual gear shifting

General notesYou can change gear yourself using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.Depending on which steering wheel paddleshifter is pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear down orup, if permitted.To use manual shifting, you have two options:Rtemporary settingRpermanent settingIf you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-function display will show the current gearinstead of transmission position D.If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gearswill be selected automatically.


Drivingandparking

Z

Temporary setting

X To activate: shift the selector lever to posi-tion P.

X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;.Temporary setting will be active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in thecase of lateral acceleration, during an overrunphase or when driving on steep terrain.X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddleshifter; and hold it in place.

orX Use the lever to switch the transmission posi-tion.

orX All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button tochange the drive program.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMICSELECT controller to change the drive pro-gram.

Permanent setting



X Press button:.X To deactivate: press button:.



X Press button:.X To deactivate: press button:.orX If position D (automatic transmission) isselected for the transmission in drive pro-gram I: shift to drive program I with theDYNAMIC SELECT controller.

Shifting gears


X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If themaximum engine speed on the currentlyengaged gear is reached and you continue to


accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts up in order to prevent enginedamage.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles! If manual gearshifting is permanently acti-vated, the automatic transmission does notshift up automatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.

Shift recommendation


The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.


The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)! If manual gearshifting is permanently acti-vated, the automatic transmission does notshift up automatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.


Drivingandparking

Z

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.X When the UP message appears in the multi-function display, pull on the right-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter.

KickdownX For maximum acceleration, depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-mission shifts up to the next gear when themaximum engine speed is reached. This pre-vents the engine from overrevving.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is onlypossible in the temporary setting.


Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): it is only partiallypossible to engage the gears, or the transmission is in position N.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to shift into second gearand reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if D is selected, the transmission shiftsinto second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts intoreverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Refueling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Refueling 143

Drivingandparking

Z

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection systemcould otherwise be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 313).

Refueling

General informationThe fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you unlock or lock the vehiclewith the key or using KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueledX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuelmay leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are drivingwith the fuel filler cap open,the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes.The; Check Engine warning lamp mayalso light up. A message appears in the mul-tifunction display (Y page 219).For further information on warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 236).

144 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 immediately and remove it(Y page 124).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 71).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 73).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking


G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P.Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the igni-tion lock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-

Parking 145

Drivingandparking

Z

cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 134).

X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GOStart/Stop button (Y page 124).The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to SmartKey position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position 0 (Y page 124).

The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This func-tion operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe system, it may not be possible to apply thereleased parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it rollingaway.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contact aqualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a functiontest at regular intervals while the engine isswitched off. The sounds that can be heardwhilethis is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is engaged,theF (USA only) or! (Canada only)red indicator lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster.The electric parking brake can also be appliedwhen the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released:Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

146 ParkingDrivingandparking

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from beingautomatically applied, pull handle:.The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-matically if:RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicleto a standstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-tionary

In addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is openedRthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyengaged if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released automat-ically when all of the following conditions arefulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lidmust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of P or you have previ-ously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceleratorpedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parkingbrake will be released and the vehicle will startto move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle: of the electricparking brake.The vehicle is braked for as long as the handleof the electric parking brake is pressed. Thelonger the electric parking brake handle isdepressed, the greater the braking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Parking Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

Driving tips 147

Drivingandparking

Z

for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RObserve the service intervals in the Mainte-nance Booklet or in the service interval dis-play. Have all themaintenancework carried inaccordance with Daimler AG regulations.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control


Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Work relevant tosafety or work on safety-related systems in par-ticular must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display shows you how economicalyour driving style is. The ECO display assists youin achieving the most economical driving stylefor the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-ence the vehicle's consumption.

148 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

: Acceleration; Coasting= Constant? Additional range achievedRange? is shownunder Bonus fr. start andrepresents the additional range achieved sincethe beginning of the journey as a result of anadapted driving style.If the fuel level has dropped into the reserverange, the Reserve fuel message is shown inthe multifunction display instead of range?.The8warning lamp in the instrument clusteralso lights up (Y page 236).

The ECO display consists of three sections, withan inner and outer area. The sections corre-spond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-eration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: moderateacceleration, especially at higherspeedsRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: sporty acceler-ation

; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-tion processes):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: anticipatorydriving, keeping your distance andearly release of the accelerator.The vehicle can coast without useof the brakes.Rthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: frequent heavybraking

= Constant (continuous evaluationover the entire journey):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: constantspeed and avoidance of unneces-sary acceleration and decelerationRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: fluctuations inspeed

The three inner areas display the current drivingstyle and light up green as a result of a particu-larly economical driving style. Depending on thedriving situation, up to two areas may light upsimultaneously.At the beginning of the journey, the three outerareas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-nomical driving. A higher level indicates a moreeconomical driving style. If the three outer areasare completely filled at the same time, the driverhas adopted the most economical driving stylefor the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. The ECO display border lights up.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. The additionally achieved rangedisplayed under Bonus fr. start does notindicate a fixed consumption reduction.

Driving tips 149

Drivingandparking

Z

In addition to driving style, the actual consump-tion is affected by other factors, such as:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRactive electrical consumersThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.An economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.Achieving a higher value in the categories"Acceleration" and "Constant":Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E.On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on thehighway, only the outer area for "constant" willchange.The ECO display summarizes the driving stylefrom the start of the journey to its completion.Therefore, there are more marked changes inthe outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For moremarked changes, perform a manual rest(Y page 193).For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 192).

Braking


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long, steep gradients, you must reducethe load on the brakes. To use engine braking,shift to a lower gear in good time. This helpsyou to avoid overheating the brakes andwear-ing them out excessively.

When making use of the engine brakingeffect, it is possible that a drive wheelmay notturn for some time, e.g. in the case of sud-denly changing or slippery road surface con-ditions. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden.This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the airflowto cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You then have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

150 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! As the ESP® system operates automatically,the engine and the ignition system must beswitched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 inthe ignition lock or Start/Stop button in posi-tion 0 or 1) when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dyna-mometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed withthe front axle raised.

Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP®may seriously damage the brake sys-tem.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals.

Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 58)and on Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist(Y page 59).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only havebrake pads/linings installed on your vehiclewhich have been approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles or which correspond to an equivalentquality standard. Brake pads/liningswhich havenot been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehiclesor which are not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

High-performance and ceramic brakesystem (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)The AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking. Thiswill depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceRAmbient conditions, e.g. temperature andhumidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age thatwill be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain more information on this from aqualified specialist workshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brakewear. Observe the brake systemwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. Especially for high performance driving,it is important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving tips 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speedsRthe tires have adequate tread depthFor this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speedRavoid rutsRavoid sudden steering movementsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle couldskid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Alwaysadapt your driving style and drive at a speed tosuit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 288).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 288).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 288).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. On long and steepdownhill gradients, especially if the vehicle isladen, youmust select a lower gear in good time.By doing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load on the

152 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

brake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Stores the current speed or a higher speed; Storing the current speed or calling up the

last stored speed= Stores the current speed or a lower speed? Deactivating cruise controlWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds. The speed is then permanentlydisplayed in the status indicator together withthe¯ symbol.

On vehicles with a segment ring in the speed-ometer, the segments from the currently savedspeed to the end of the segment ring light up.

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining a speedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

You can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Storing or calling up a speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Driving systems 153

Drivingandparking

Z

Setting a speed

G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/orserious injury to you and others.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: to the pressurepoint for a higher speed, or down? for alower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: past the pres-sure point for a higher speed, or down? fora lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the speed stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For example, ifyou accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards: .

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®RBrake Assist intervenesRyou shift from transmission position DIf cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐trol offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is deleted.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

General notesDistance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speedand automatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. The sys-tem detects vehicles using the radar sensor sys-tem. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automat-ically to avoid exceeding the set speed or tomaintain the designated distance from the vehi-cle in front.You must select a lower gear in good time onlong and steep downhill gradients, especially ifthe vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will makeuse of the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system and pre-


vents the brakes from overheating and wearingtoo quickly.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there isa risk of a collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-sion. An intermittent warning tone will thensound and the distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster. Brake immediatelyin order to increase the distance from the vehi-cle in front, or take evasive action, provided it issafe to do so.For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system must beoperational.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the rangebetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph(200 km/h).Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv-ing on roads with steep gradients.As Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radarwaves, it can resemble the radar detectors ofthe responsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.


G WARNINGDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary objects on the road, e.g. stoppedor parked vehiclesRoncoming vehicles and crossing trafficAs a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDistance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot alwaysclearly identify other road users and complextraffic situations.In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONICmay:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONICwarns you.

G WARNINGDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehiclewith up to 50% of the maximum possibledeceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi-cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts youwith a visual and acoustic warning. There is arisk of an accident.Apply the brakes yourself in these situationsand try to take evasive action.

! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations.

Driving systems 155

Drivingandparking

Z

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDistance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLDfunction in the following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DistancePilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in your lane.Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-row vehicles driving in front, e.g.motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects avehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC mayunexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the left-handlaneRbe so high when driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Cruise control lever: Stores the current speed or a higher speed; Setting a specified minimum distance= Storing the current speed or calling up the

last stored speed? Stores the current speed or a lower speedA Switching off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONICand storing, maintaining and calling upa speed

Important safety notes! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDistance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLDfunction in the following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes of driving before Distance PilotDISTRONIC is ready for use.Rthe electric parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.


ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down; .Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: to the pressurepoint for a higher speed, or down; for alower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: past the pres-sure point for a higher speed, or down; fora lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the Distance Pilot passive mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONICwhen stationary. The lowest speed that can beset is 20 mph (30 km/h).

Activates at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isactivated, it stores the current speed or reg-ulates the speed of the vehicle to the previ-ously stored speed.

Pulling away and drivingX If you want to pull away with DistancePilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

orX If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated:accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically. Be ready to brake at alltimes.If there is no vehicle in front, Distance PilotDISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the drivingspeed. However, the vehicle is only acceleratedup to the speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles): DistancePilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving stylewhen you have selected the S or S+ drive pro-gram (Y page 131). Acceleration behind thevehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice-ablymore dynamic. If you have selected theC orE driving program, the vehicle accelerates moregently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.AMG vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC sup-ports a sporty driving style when you have selec-ted the S or S+ or M drive program(Y page 132). Acceleration behind the vehicle in

Driving systems 157

Drivingandparking

Z

front or to the set speed is then noticeably moredynamic. When you select the C drive program,the vehicle acceleratesmore gently. This settingis recommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you want to change to the overtaking lane onmulti-lane roads, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC sup-ports you ifRyou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining thedistance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currentlydetect a danger of collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, Distance PilotDISTRONIC monitors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) or the right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles).

StoppingIf Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that thevehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicleuntil it is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake. After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also be shif-ted into position P automatically.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: to the pressurepoint for a higher speed, or down; for alower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: past the pres-sure point for a higher speed, or down; fora lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

Settings a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDistance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the timespan between one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set theminimumdistance thatDistance Pilot DISTRONICmaintains to the vehi-cle in front, dependent on the vehicle speed. Youcan see this distance in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 159).The specified minimum distance can bechanged while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isswitched on or off.Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safedistance from the vehicle in front. Adjust thedistance to the vehicle in front if necessary.


Cruise control leverX To increase: turn control= toward;.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains agreater distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= toward:.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains ashorter distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays inthe instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,one ormore segments; in the set speed rangelight up.If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle infront, segments; between speed of the vehi-cle in front= and stored speed: light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isdeactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 197).

Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC isactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activatedX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 197).

You will initially see the stored speed for aboutfive seconds when you activate Distance PilotDISTRONIC.

Driving systems 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Cruise control leverThere are several ways to deactivate DistancePilot DISTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,the Distance Pilot off message appears inthe multifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivatedif you depress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, Distance PilotDISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to thelast speed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-tivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically securedwith the elec-tric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor is openRthe vehicle has skiddedIf Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated auto-matically, you will hear a warning tone. TheDistance Pilot off message will appear inthe multifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

Tips for driving with Distance PilotDISTRONIC

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you must beparticularly attentive. In such situations, brake ifnecessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is thenswitched off.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can detect vehicleswhen cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect vehi-cles which are not driving in the middle of theirlane. The distance to the vehicle in front will betoo short.


Other vehicles changing lanes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehi-cle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not yet detectedthe vehicle in front on the edge of the roadbecause of its narrow width. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example,the detected vehicle turns a corner and an

obstacle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them.

Crossing vehicles

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenlydetect vehicles that are crossing your lane.If you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC underthe following conditions, the vehicle could pullaway unintentionally:Rat traffic lights with crossing traffic, for exam-pleRif there is a vehicle in front after a crossingwith the HOLD function activated

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with SteeringPilot and Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilotand Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehi-cle in the center of the driving lane by means ofmoderate steering interventions in a speedrange from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).Itmonitors lanemarkings and vehicles in front ofyour vehicle by means of camera system: atthe top of the windshield.

Driving systems 161

Drivingandparking

Z

At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&GoPilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking intoaccount lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehi-cles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), theSteering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle infront if detected lane markings are not presentat speeds of up to 80 mph (130 km/h).If these conditions are not present, SteeringPilot and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis-tance.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active inorder for the function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DistancePilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot andStop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics. It can-not take into account road, weather or trafficconditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid.You are responsible for the distance to the vehi-cle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilotand Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road andtraffic conditions and does not detect all roadusers. If you are following a vehicle which isdriving towards the edge of the road, your vehi-cle could come into contact with the curb orother road boundaries. Be particularly aware ofother road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directlynext to your vehicle.Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane orprojecting into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilotand Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keepyour vehicle in the lane. In some cases, thesteering intervention is not sufficient to bringthe vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, youmust steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that itdoes not leave the lane.

The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no lanemarkings, or several unclearlane markings are present, e.g. around con-struction sitesRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too shortand thus the lane markings cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change lanesRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-matically active again.

Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provideassistance:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety noteson Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 155).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you havestill not started to steer and have not taken hold


of the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot andStop&Go Pilot then switch to passivemode. Dis-tance Pilot DISTRONIC remains active.

Activating Steering Pilot and Stop&GoPilotX Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 197).The Steering Pilot onmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The Steering Pilotand Stop&Go Pilot are switched on.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are activatedbut not ready for a steering intervention, steer-ing wheel symbol: appears in gray. If the sys-tem provides you with support by means ofsteering interventions, symbol: is shown ingreen.

Deactivating Steering Pilot and Stop&GoPilotX Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC withSteering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 197).The Steering Pilot offmessage appearsin themultifunction display. Steering Pilot andStop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When the Distance Pilot is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDistance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLDfunction in the following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 164).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all of thefollowing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

Driving systems 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure until HOLD disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-ing brake.Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also be shif-ted into position P automatically.

RACE START

Important safety notesi RACE START must not be used on normalroads. RACE START must only be activatedand used on dedicated road circuits, outsideof public road use.

i RACE START is only available inMercedes‑AMG vehicles.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration froma standing start. For this, a suitably high-griproad surface is required, along with the tires andvehicle being in proper operating condition.

G WARNINGIf you use RACE START, individual tires maystart to spin and the vehicle could skid.Depending on the selected ESP® mode, thereis an increased risk of skidding and having anaccident. Make sure that no persons, animalsor obstacles are within range of the vehicle.

i Observe the safety notes on driving safetysystems (Y page 58).Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-tion on ESP® (Y page 63).

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and the engine andtransmission are at operating temperature.This is the case when the oil temperaturegauge in the multifunction display is shown inwhite (Y page 201).RESP® is functioning correctly. (Y page 63)Rthe drive program S, S+ or Race is selected(Y page 132)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal isdepressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.


Activating RACE STARTi When manual mode (Y page 139) is active,the transmission automatically shifts up toRACE START in the drive program. This func-tion supports maximum acceleration withRACE START. After going through an acceler-ating process once from a stationary position,this function is automatically deactivated.

X Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Pull and hold both steeringwheel paddle shift-ers.

X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears inthe multifunction display.

X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACESTART Not Possible See Operator'sManualmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 139).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 139).The RACE START available Depressaccelerator message appears in the multi-function display.i If you do not depress the accelerator pedalwithin a few seconds, RACE START is can-celed. The multifunction display shows theRACE START Canceled message.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake to startmessage appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedal withina short time, RACE START will be canceled.The multifunction display shows the RACESTART Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-ation.The RACE START activemessage appears inthe multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-ada: 50 km/h).

RACE START is deactivated immediately if yourelease the accelerator pedal during RACESTART or if any of the activation conditions areno longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐sible See Operator's Manual or RACESTART Canceled message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only available againafter the vehicle has been driven a certaindistance.

Adaptive Damping System

General notesA suspension with the Adaptive Damping Sys-tem provides improved driving comfort and con-tinuously controls the calibration of the damp-ers. The damping characteristics adapt to thecurrent operating and driving situation.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface conditionsRthe selected drive program (Y page 131).

Selecting the Comfort or Economy driveprograms

In the Comfort and Economy drive programs,the driving characteristics of your vehicle aremore comfortable. Select one of these driveprograms if you favor a more comfortable driv-ing style. Also select these drive programswhendriving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: repeat-edly until the Comfort or Economy drive pro-gram is selected.

Selecting Sport modeThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning inthe Sport drive program ensures even bettercontact with the road. Select this drive programwhen employing a sporty driving style, e.g. onwinding country roads.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: as manytimes as necessary until the Sport drive pro-gram is selected.

Selecting Sport Plus modeThe firmer suspension settings in the SportPlus drive program ensures even better contactwith the road. Select this mode when employinga sporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads or, ideally, when driving on closed racecircuits.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: repeat-edly until the Sport Plus drive program isselected.

Activating the driving dynamics display

Using the driving dynamics display in the multi-media system display, you can see the driveprogram you selected as well as additional infor-mation on the vehicle's operating state.X Switch on the multimedia system. You canfind further information in the separateCOMAND operating instructions.

X Press button:.The driving dynamics display appears in themultimedia system display.

The following information on the vehicle's oper-ating status is displayed in the driving dynamicsdisplay:RDrive program selected (Y page 131)RAccelerator pedal position shown in %RBrake pedal position shown in %RSteering angleRDamping setting selectedRG-FORCE cross displaying longitudinal andlateral acceleration (only available in Sport orSport Plus drive programs)

Active Body Control ABC (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles)

Setting the vehicle level

General notesThe vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMICSELECT button (Y page 131) or the level button.The setting always corresponds to the lastselected function.In order to reduce fuel consumption andimprove the driving dynamics, the vehicle is low-ered as its speed increases. In the Sport andSport Plus drive programs, it is lowered by up to0.5 in (13 mm) compared to the normal vehiclelevel. In the Comfort and CURVE drive pro-grams, it is lowered by up to 0.2 in (5 mm) com-pared to the normal vehicle level. As the speedis reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the setvehicle height.Select the normal level for normal road surfacesand the raised level for driving with snow chainsor on particularly poor road surfaces.

Important safety notesG WARNINGThe vehicle is slightly lowered if you:Rhave selected the SPORT suspension tun-ing at normal level andRswitch off the enginePersons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or theunderbody may thus become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you switchoff the engine.


Setting raised level

X Make sure that the engine is running or that ithas been switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

X Make sure that a speed of 75 mph(120 km/h) is not exceeded.

X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but-ton:.If the engine has been switched off by the ECOstart/stop function, it is now restarted.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 1.2 in (31 mm).

Setting the normal levelX Make sure that the engine is running or that ithas been switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

X If indicator lamp; is lit: press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rare driving faster than approximately 75 mph(120 km/h).Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h)Ror switch to the drive program while the vehi-cle is in motion.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electro-hydraulically controlled suspensionfeatures improved driving dynamics, drivingsafety and ride comfort. You can also choosebetween a sporty, a particularly sporty, a com-fortable and a comfortable mode with corneringfunction (CURVE).

The suspension is continuously tuned to eachwheel individually and depends on:Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRthe vehicle loadRthe drive program selectedEach time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, theComfort driveprogram is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 125).

Selecting Comfort mode

In the Comfort drive program, the driving char-acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-ble. Select this mode if you favor a more com-fortable driving style.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: as manytimes as necessary until the Comfort driveprogram is selected.

Selecting Sport modeThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning inthe Sport drive program ensures even bettercontact with the road. Select this mode if youfavor a firmer suspension setting.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: as manytimes as necessary until the Sport drive pro-gram is selected.

Selecting Sport Plus modeThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning inthe Sport Plus drive program ensures even bet-ter contact with the road. Select thismode if youfavor a firmer suspension setting.X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: as manytimes as necessary until the Sport Plus driveprogram is selected.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Selecting the CURVE settingIn the CURVE drive program, the curve tiltingfunction is activated. The vehicle inclinesinwards by up to 2.65 degrees on bends. The tiltfunction and the comfort suspension tuningincrease driving comfort in corners. CURVE isavailable in the speed range between 9 mph(15 km/h) and 112mph (180 km/h). Select thismode on winding roads in particular. Outsidethis speed range, the CURVE drive program isthe same as the Comfort drive program.The curve tilting function monitors the road infront of your vehicle by means of a cameraattached at the top of the windshield. This func-tion is automatically active if you select theCURVE drive program. The system is opera-tional at speeds of up to 112 mph (180 km/h).X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button: as manytimes as necessary until the CURVE driveprogram is selected.

The system is deactivated if you select a differ-ent drive program.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rif you are driving slower than 9 mph(15 km/h) or faster than 112 mph(180 km/h).Rif the vehicle is fully laden.Rif you drive with very high lateral acceleration.

Activating the driving dynamics display

Using the driving dynamics display in the multi-media system display, you can see the driveprogram you selected as well as additional infor-mation on the vehicle's operating state.

X Switch on the multimedia system. You canfind further information in the separateCOMAND operating instructions.

X Press button:.The driving dynamics display appears in themultimedia system display.

The following information on the vehicle's oper-ating status is displayed in the driving dynamicsdisplay:RDrive program selected (Y page 131)RAccelerator pedal position shown in %RBrake pedal position shown in %RSteering angleRActivity of the ABC spring strutsRVehicle level display (Y page 166)RLevel settings animationRG-FORCE cross displaying longitudinal andlateral acceleration (only available in Sport orSport Plus drive programs)

Active Body Control ABC (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Setting the vehicle level

General notesThe vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMICSELECT controller (Y page 132) or the on-boardcomputer (Y page 169). The setting always cor-responds to the last selected function.In order to reduce fuel consumption andimprove the driving dynamics, the vehicle is low-ered as its speed increases. In the Sport andSport Plus drive programs it is lowered by up to0.5 in (13 mm), and in the Comfort drive pro-gram by up to 0.2 in (5 mm) compared to thenormal vehicle level. As the speed is reduced,the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, theComfort driveprogram is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 125).Select the normal level for normal road surfacesand the raised level for driving with snow chainsor on particularly poor road surfaces.

Important safety notesThe vehicle is slightly lowered when the engineis switched off.


G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

Setting raised level


X Make sure that a speed of 75 mph(120 km/h) is not exceeded.

X If symbol; is not shown: press=or; on the steering wheel to select theDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectVehicle level.X Press thea button.The followingmessage appears:: Vehiclelevel Raise with OK.

X Press thea button.If the engine has been switched off by the ECOstart/stop function, it is now restarted.Icon; appears. The vehicle height is adjus-ted to raised level.

Setting the normal level


X If symbol; is shown: press= or;on the steering wheel to select the DriveAs‐sist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectVehicle level.X Press thea button.The followingmessage appears:: Vehiclelevel Lower with OK.

X Press thea button.Icon; is faded out. The vehicle is adjusted tonormal level.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rare driving faster than approximately 75 mph(120 km/h).Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h).Ror switch to the drive program while the vehi-cle is in motion.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electro-hydraulically controlled suspensionfeatures improved driving dynamics, drivingsafety and ride comfort. You can also choosebetween a particularly sporty or a comfortabletuning.The suspension is continuously tuned to eachwheel individually and depends on:Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRthe vehicle loadRthe drive program selectedYour selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, the comfortablesetting is activated. For further informationabout starting the engine, see (Y page 125).

Selecting sports tuning

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contact withthe road. Select this mode if you favor a firmersuspension setting.X Make sure that the engine is running or that ithas been switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected.The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Selecting comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Select thismode if you favor a more comfortable drivingstyle.


X If indicator lamp; is lit: press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. Comfortable sus-pension tuning is selected.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Activating the driving dynamics displayin the COMAND displayUsing the driving dynamics display in the multi-media system display, you can see the driveprogram you selected as well as additional infor-mation on the vehicle's operating status.X Switch on COMAND. You can find furtherinformation in the separate COMAND operat-ing instructions.

The following information on the vehicle's oper-ating status is displayed in the driving dynamicsdisplay:RDrive program selected (Y page 132)RAccelerator pedal position shown in %RBrake pedal position shown in %RSteering angleRVehicle level display (Y page 168)RActivity of the ABC spring strutsRLevel settings animationRG-FORCE cross to display longitudinal and lat-eral acceleration (only available in Sport,Sport Plus and RACE drive programs)ROverrun mode animation

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there are


no persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean

the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 269).

Range

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the center air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is located onthe cover behind the seats in the rear compart-ment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segmentsshowing operational readiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC; Indicator lampIf indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.


Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds,and the indicator lamp inthe PARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 269).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. It measures the road on bothsides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicatesa suitable parking space. Active steering inter-vention can assist you during parking and whenexiting a parking space. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 170).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safe maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-ing Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

result in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable for park-ing, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 172) warning messages during theparking procedure.RAt any time, you can intervene in the steeringprocedure to correct it. Active Parking Assistwill then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are alwayscorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. noton the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections orloading ramps of goods vehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 171).Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwards

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-tem independently locates and measures park-ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the size of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit intothe parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Bydefault, Active Parking Assist only displays park-


ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain activated until you confirm theuse of Active Parking Assist by pressing thea button on the multifunction steeringwheel. The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you by inter-vening actively in the steering. If you do notbrake there is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist: pressthea button on themultifunction steeringwheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist Active Select RObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist Finished message appearsin the multifunction display and a warning tonesounds. The vehicle is now parked.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions. When Active Park-ing Assist is finished, you must steer again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,you should cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should thetransmission change take place too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-ble parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can supportyou when exiting the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide, as the position of the vehicle mustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the parkingspace.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youwill drive out of the parking space.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:message appears in the multifunction display%.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active Park-ing Assist: press thea button on themul-tifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to the message whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveSurroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Finished message appears inthe multifunction display. You will then have tosteer and merge into traffic on your own.PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take overthe steering, before the vehicle has exited theparking space completely. This is useful, forexample when you recognize that it is alreadypossible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centerconsole (Y page 172).PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automaticallyif:Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ ESPwarning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbolgoes out and the Park Assist Canceledmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you muststeer again yourself.


Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind yourvehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdisplay depends on the language setting. Thefollowing are examples of rear view cameradisplays in the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-ter

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 270)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).For technical reasons, leaving the standardheight can result in inaccuracies in the guidelines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chas-sis.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in themultimedia system;see the Digital Operator's Manual.

X Engage reverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia systemThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin close range above the handle on the trunklid

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted post

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Use the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 172), addi-tional measurement operational readiness indi-cator; appears in the multimedia system. Ifthe PARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in the multi-media system.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle


X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 177).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 177).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

180° view

: Symbol for the 180° view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta 180° view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 172),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in themultimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warningdisplays are active, warning displays= light upin the multimedia system in yellow or redaccordingly.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests you take a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Itmight not always recognize fatigue or increasinginattentiveness in time or fail to recognize themat all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving slower than37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot ofDistance Pilot DISTRONIC activatedRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The attention level evaluation is deleted andrestarts when the journey is continued, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break


Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 196) ofthe on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTIONASSIST using the on-board computer(Y page 197).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levelsfrom high to low.Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output a warn-ing, the System suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 197).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with whichthe system determines the attention level is setto normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.The attention level detected by Attention Assistis adapted accordingly and the driver is warnedearlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÀ symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance display when theengine is running.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the engine

has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: Attention Assist: Take abreak!In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest. If you do not takea break, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. The precondition forthis is that ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typ-ical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issuedin the multifunction display, a service stationsearch is performed in COMAND. You can selecta service station and navigation to this servicestation will then begin. This function can be acti-vated and deactivated in COMAND.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data stored in the navigation system andgeneral traffic regulations are used to determinethe current speed limit.As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-works) are not detected.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits is upda-ted.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol: is shown in theassistance graphic display (Y page 197).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 197).

X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.

Speed limits in wet conditions

: Maximum permitted speed; Additional signs for wet conditionsA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) applies inwet conditions and if TrafficSign Assist has determined that the restrictionmust be observed.


Canceling the speed limit

The speed limit no longer applies:.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you are driv-ing. It is generally neither shown on the trafficsign nor on the instrument cluster butmust betaken into account when observing the max-imum permitted speed.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance package consistsof Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 154),Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot, Active BlindSpot Assist (Y page 183) and Active Lane Keep-ing Assist (Y page 186).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas oneither side of the vehicle that are not directlyvisible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facingradar sensors. A warning light in the exteriormirrors draws your attention to vehicles detec-ted in the monitored area. If you then switch onthe corresponding turn signal to change lane,youwill also receive an optical and audiblewarn-ing. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, cor-rective braking may help you avoid a collision.Before a course-correcting brake application,Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space inthe direction of travel and at the sides of thevehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist usesthe forward-facing radar sensors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Active Blind Spot Assistare integrated in the rear bumper and in theradiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers andradiator trim are free from dirt, ice and slush.The rear sensorsmust not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Fol-

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

lowing a severe impact or in the event of damageto the bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialist work-shop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise nolonger work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles driving at the inneredge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedsbelow approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-cated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi-cator lamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicatorlamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange at speeds above approximately 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning alwaysoccurs when a vehicle enters the monitoringrange from behind or from the side. When youovertake a vehicle, thewarning only occurs if thedifference in speed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to the ambi-ent light.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You will then hear a double warning


tone and redwarning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,display; underlining the danger of a side col-lision appears in the multifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-cor-recting brake application may be interrupted atany time if you steer slightly in the oppositedirection or depress the accelerator pedal morefirmly.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated (Y page 198).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, alane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in a speed rangebetween 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system must beoperational.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. Active LaneKeeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsi-ble for the distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no lanemarkings, or several unclearlane markings are present, e.g. around con-struction sitesRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too shortand thus the lane markings cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions onthe roadwayRno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andthere are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system detects certain conditions andwarns you accordingly.


The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abendRthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system detects solid lane markingsThe warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the systemmaymake an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-ing over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk ofan accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking recognized asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be recog-nized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canhave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applicationcan only occur after your vehicle has returnedto the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane inwhich you are driving.Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-uation. An inappropriate brake application maybe interrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Rswitch on the turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings are no longer detected

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 198).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 197) are shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.



G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 32).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted using the brightness control knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 32).

X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise orcounter-clockwise.If you turn the light switch (Y page 105) to theÃ, T or L position, the brightnesswill depend upon the brightness of the ambi-ent light.The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display. In daylight, the displaysin the instrument cluster are not illuminated.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 152):The segments light up from the stored speedto the maximum speed.RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated(Y page 154):One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle infront moving more slowly than the storedspeed:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 191).A change in the outside temperature is shown inthe multifunction display after a delay.

Displays and operation 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32).TheHmarking in the coolant temperature gaugecorresponds to a coolant temperature ofapproximately 248 ‡ (120 †).Under normal operating conditions and at thecorrect coolant level, the coolant temperaturegauge may rise to the H marking.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,or an audio track or video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephone num-ber

190 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in thedesired frequency range, selectsan audio track or video scene usingrapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumber

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystemRHides displaymessages or calls upthe last Trip menu function usedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

? RSwitches on the Voice Control Sys-tem

Further information on the Voice Control Sys-tem is available in the separate operatinginstructions.

Multifunction display

: Drive program (Y page 134); Transmission position (Y page 134)= Text field? Menu barA TimeB Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 198)Set the time using the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).X To display menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.If you do not press the buttons any longer,menu bar? is faded out after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selectedmenu or sub-menu and display messages.

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-play:RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shiftingmanually (Y page 141)Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 173)RCRUISE Cruise control(Y page 152)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist(Y page 108)Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 127)Rë HOLD function (Y page 163)Ra Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot(Y page 154)

Displays and operation 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewUsing the= or; button on the steeringwheel, open the menu bar.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 190).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect the following menu:RTrip menu (Y page 192)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 193)RAudio menu (Y page 194)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 195)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 196)RServ menu (Y page 198)RSett menu (settings) (Y page 198)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 201)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time

= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey whilst thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 193).In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-matically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.ECO displayThe ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select ECODISPLAY.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 148).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays approximate range:.

192 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the display withapproximate range: and current fuel con-sumption;.Approximate range: that can be covered iscalculated according to your current drivingstyle and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, a vehicle being refueledCappears instead of approximate range:.Recuperation display= shows you if energyhas been recuperated from the kinetic energyin overrun mode and saved in the battery.Recuperation display= depends on theengine installed and is therefore not availablein all vehicles.

Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.A gearshift recommendation Z may alsoappear in the display.Observe the information on gearshift recom-mendation when shifting manually(Y page 141).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-mendation is shown in the status bar of themultifunction display and not in the digitalspeedometer display.

Resetting valuesX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From Start" trip computer are also

reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"trip computer, the values in the ECO display arealso reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Observe the additional information on naviga-tion in the separate operating instructions of themultimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Menus and submenus 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see change-of-direction symbol= and dis-tance graphic;. The distance indicator short-ens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended=: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes of direc-tion without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additional infor-mation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory positionThe multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The presetposition is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectRadio (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.


-board

computerand

displays

X To select a preset list or station list: pressand briefly hold the9 or: button untilthe preset list or station list in the desiredfrequency range is shown.

X To select a station: briefly press9or:.

SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normalradio.For more information on radio operation, see"Satellite radio" in the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Audio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode (see the separateoperating instructions).


X To select the next/previous track: brieflypress the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapidscrolling): press and hold the9 or:button until desired track: appears.If you press and hold the9 or: button,the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support this func-tion.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system and selectvideo DVD (see the separate operatinginstructions).


X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene:appears.

Telephone menu

Introduction


When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system(Y page 241).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system (Y page 243).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.

X Press: or9 to select the names oneafter the other.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and holdthe: or9 button for longer than onesecond.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance menu

IntroductionDepending on your vehicle's equipment, in theDriveAssist menu, you have the followingoptions:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 197)RMercedes-AMG vehicles: setting the vehiclelevel (Y page 168)RActivating or deactivating Steering Pilot andStop&Go Pilot (Y page 197)RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist(Y page 197)RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assistwith cross-traffic function (Y page 197)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 197)RActivating/deactivating Active Blind SpotAssist (Y page 198)RActivating/deactivating Active Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 198)


-board

computerand

displays

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select Assist.Graphic.X Pressa to confirm your selection.The multifunction display shows the DistancePilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assis-tance graphic.The assistance graphic shows you the statusof and/or information from other driving sys-tems or driving safety systems:RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 181)RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 154)RActive Brake Assist (Y page 60)RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-tion (Y page 67)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 186)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Activating/deactivating Steering Pilotand Stop&Go PilotX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select SteeringPilot.X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot areactivated, themultifunction display shows theSteering Pilot On message.

Further information on Steering Pilot andStop&Go Pilot (Y page 161).

Activating or deactivating Active BrakeAssistYou can use this function to activate or deacti-vate Active Brake Assist.You can use the function to activate or deacti-vate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with theDriving Assistance Plus package, to activate ordeactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-trafficfunction.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBrake Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.If Active Brake Assist or Active Brake Assistwith cross-traffic function is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the assistancegraphic display of the multifunction display.

Further information on Active Brake Assist(Y page 60).Further information on Active Brake Assist withcross-traffic function (Y page 67).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Sensitive.X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play in the assistance graphics display.

Further information on ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 180).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Activating/deactivating Active BlindSpot AssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 183).

Activating/deactivating Active LaneKeeping AssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keeping Assist.X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.

X Pressa again.X Press: or9 to set Off, Standard orAdaptive.X Press thea button to save the setting.When Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated,the multifunction display shows the lanemarkings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

Further information on Active Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 186).

Service menuDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:RCalling up display messages (Y page 204)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 292)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 265)

Settings menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, in the Sett.menu you have the follow-ing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 198)RChanging the light settings (Y page 199)RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 200)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 200)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 201)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-tifunction display.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.The current setting km or miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRnavigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRDistance Pilot DISTRONICRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent displayThe Permanent Display: function allows youto choose whether the multifunction displayalways shows the outside temperature or thespeed.The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.


-board

computerand

displays

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting, Outside Temperatureor Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer[mph], appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again.

Lights

Setting the daytime running lightsThis function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction display areshown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lamps(Y page 105).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/- function.The current setting appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Off to Level 5(bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light Col. function.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set the colorto SOLAR, SOLAR Orange or SOLAR Red.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the SurroundLighting function.If the Surround Lighting function is activa-ted, the multifunction display shows the lightcone and the area around the vehicle inorange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exteriorlighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start the engine.If you have activated the Surround lightingfunction and you turn the light switch toÃ,the following functions are activated when it isdark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 105).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you close allthe doors and the trunk lid, the exterior light-ing goes off after 15 seconds.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, whenthe surround lighting and delayed switch-offexterior lighting are on, the following light up:RParking lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delayfunction, the interior lighting remains on for20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.When the Interior Lighting Delay func-tion is activated, the vehicle interior is dis-played in orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above aspeed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic Door Lock function isactivated, themultifunction display shows theleft-hand vehicle door in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lockingfeature, see (Y page 77).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, anacoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-cle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction displaylights up orange.


Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.



-board

computera

nddisplays

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the Easy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,the multifunction display shows the steeringwheel in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 99).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt Adjustment function is acti-vated, the seat belt is displayed in orange inthe multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment, see(Y page 43).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only availablewhen the vehicle isequipped with the electrical fold-in function.This function is only available in Canada.When you activate the Auto. Mirror Foldingfunction, the exterior mirrors are folded in whenthe vehicle is locked.If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors using the button on the door(Y page 101), they will not fold out automati-cally. The exterior mirrors can then only be fol-ded out using the button on the door.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction display showsthe exterior mirror in orange.


Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected Yes and confirmed, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Light submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine and transmission oil temperature:when the engine and transmission are at nor-mal operating temperature, oil tempera-ture? andB are displayed in white in themultifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orB in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.

SETUP

: Engine mode C, S, S+ or M; Suspension setting SPORT or COMFORT= Transmission position D/M? ESP® mode (On/Off)SETUP displays the following information, func-tions and settings:Rthe digital speedometerRthe gear indicatorRthe engine modeRthe suspension modeRthe transmission positionRthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) modeX Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time appears for five sec-onds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.It is possible to store amaximumof sixteen laps.The 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ish Lap.


-board

computerand

displays

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steering wheel.X Confirm Yes witha.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 inthe ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey toposition 3 and then pressa to confirmStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset Lap.X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. If youhave stopped 16 laps, the current lap does nothave to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm Reset.Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select Yes and pressthea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedIf you save at least one lap and then stop RACE-TIMER, an overall evaluation is available.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation appears.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThis function is only available if you have storedat least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until the lapevaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 163)RParking (Y page 145)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-prioritydisplay messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, thecorresponding display messages are also deleted.

204 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z


÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computera

nddisplays


T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignitionwas switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of theelectric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 146).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 146).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-tinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 305).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to applythe electric parking brake manually.X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is notapplied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Operator'sManualImportant functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Active Brake AssistFunctions CurrentlyLimited See Opera‐tor's Manual

Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Restart the engine.


-board

computerand

displays


Active Brake AssistFunctions LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake AssistFunctions CurrentlyLimited See Opera‐tor's Manual

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS isdeactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivatedWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function and PRE‑SAFE® PLUSare functional again.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Restart the engine.X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 65).

Active Brake AssistFunctions LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS isnot available due to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualThe radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RDirt on sensorsRHeavy rain or snowRWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioningor is temporarily unavailable:RActive Brake AssistRActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionRDistance Pilot DISTRONICRSteering Pilot and Stop&Go PilotRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRPRE-SAFE® PLUSIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving anddrive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-appears.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Switch off the engine.X Clean all sensors (Y page 269).X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

AMalfunction ServiceRequired

The roll bars are faulty.

G WARNINGThe roll bars will then possibly not be extended in the event of anaccident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp alsolights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).


-board

computerand

displays


6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right head bagmay either be triggered unintentionally or, inthe event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-tivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag maynot be triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 47)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-tifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 47).


-board

computerand

displays


Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabledduring the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bagmay be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag(Y page 47)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-tifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutionslamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 47).

Lights


bCheck Left Low Beam(Example)

The corresponding bulb is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.orX Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamponly appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warningtone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays

Engine


?Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 263).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the enginecoolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X If the coolant temperature gauge is below the H marking(Y page 190), drive on to the next qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until theengine has cooled down.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature gauge is below the H marking(Y page 190). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge, observing thewarning notes (Y page 263).

X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and at the correct coolant level,the coolant temperature gauge may rise to the H marking(Y page 190).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra faulty alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Observe the instructions in the display message# See Oper‐ator's Manual.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 262).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 262).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if youneed to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualifiedspecialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles:The engine oil level is too low.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 262).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 262).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if youneed to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualifiedspecialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.


-board

computerand

displays


4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles:The engine oil level is too low.There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 262).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 262).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Close Gas Cap

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


ABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted.

G WARNINGThe vehicle's suspension settings may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ABC MalfunctionStop Vehicle The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the displaymessage disappears.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The vehicle is leaking oil.The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.

G WARNINGThe vehicle's suspension settings may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown serviceimmediately.

Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.

G WARNINGThe suspension settings are thus affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ÀAttention Assist:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 163).

Active Lane KeepingAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Clean the windshield.

Active Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Clean the sensors (Y page 269).X Restart the engine.

Active Blind SpotAssist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Parking Pilot Can‐celed The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-tened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched themultifunction steeringwheel whilesteering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use the Parking Pilot again later (Y page 173).

Parking Pilot Inop‐erative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-vers.Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately tenminutes (Y page 173).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Ended The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 154).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

Distance Pilot NowAvailable Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance PilotDISTRONIC (Y page 154).


-board

computerand

displays


Distance Pilot Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are also temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Restart the engine.

Distance Pilot Inop‐erative Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is faulty.The following may have also failed:RBrake Assist with cross-traffic functionRActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionRSteering Pilot and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Distance Pilot Pas‐sive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONICis no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Distance Pilot - - -mph A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not beenmet.X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC(Y page 154).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Steering Pilot Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Clean the windshield.

Steering Pilot Inop‐erative Steering Pilot and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 152).

Cruise Control - -- mph Cruise control cannot be activated, since not all of the activation con-ditions have been met.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 152).

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is faulty.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays

Tires


Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 292).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 294).

Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increaseRthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 271).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 292).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicleRyou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 271).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Shift out of Por N, Depress Brakeand Start EngineWith the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Risk of RollingAway Vehicle Not in'P'The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in positionR, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X When parking the vehicle, shift the transmission to position P.


-board

computerand

displays


Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Apply Brake toSelect R You attempted to shift from position D to position R.X Depress the brake pedal.X Shift the transmission to position R.

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit DealerYou cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ble Service Required You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running WaitTransmission Cool‐ing

The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarilyimpaired or not possible.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch offthe engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

JTrunk Partition Open

The trunk partition is open.The trunk is loaded too high and the load is preventing automaticclosing of the trunk partition.X Stow the load such that the trunk partition can close unhinderedand is not pushed upwards.

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

KDecrease Speed

You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the roof (Y page 88).


-board

computerand

displays


KVario-Roof Lowering

The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressur-ized.X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 88).

KOpen/Close Vario-Roof Completely

The roof is not locked.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Push or pull and hold the roof switch until the roof is fully open orclosed (Y page 88).

KStart Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The on-board voltage is too low.X Start the engine.X After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closingprocedure (Y page 88).

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roofdrive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the roof again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 88).

Close Rear Side Win‐dows You leave the vehicle and at least one rear side window is open.X Close the side windows (Y page 85).

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 264).

Wiper Malfunction‐ing The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard WarningFlashers Malfunc‐tioningThe hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 74).

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver'sdoor with the engine switched off.The multifunction display shows the display message a maximum of60 seconds and is simply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, theSmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warningtone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays

Warning and indicator lamps

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps 231

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Safety systems



$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.The braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays



! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J÷å!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brakewarning lamp and the yellowESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z



÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 65) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 63).

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECOstart/stop function is activated.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 65) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 63).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computera

nddisplays



M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handlingmode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 65).

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Engine



; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.In some states, youmust immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soonas the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be faulty.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 263).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gauge is below theHmarking (Y page 190). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant temperature gauge has exceeded the H marking (Y page 190). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 263).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z



X If the coolant temperature gauge is below theHmarking (Y page 190), drive onto the next qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems



· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 154).Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 60).Further information on Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (Y page 67).


-board

computera

nddisplays

Tires



h N The yellow tire pressuremonitorwarning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increaseRthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpairedThere is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 271).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 292).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this manualdescribes the basic principles for operation.More information can be found in the DigitalOperator's Manual.



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-ever, it is recommended to install it at a distanceof at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between theradiation source and a person's body (notincluding limbs such as hands, wrists, feet andlegs).

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

240 Function restrictionsMultim

ediasystem

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the q control knob.The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the8 button on the control panel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switch

themedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemCOMAND: navigation via the hard driveAudio 20: navigation via SD cardRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

Operating system 241

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theò button on the con-troller.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theò button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theò button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theò button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN®MAP PILOT(see themanufacturer's operating instructions).The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructionsare stored on the SDmemory card as a PDF file.The SD card box contains a quick guide.The following descriptions apply to navigationwith COMAND. Further information can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteRDynamic Traffic Route (only available inthe USA and Canada)Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account.

242 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

RDynamic TRF. Route After Request (onlyavailable in the USA and Canada)You can decide whether or not current trafficreports should be taken into account for routecalculation.RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. In orderto do so, instead of Start, select the menuitem Continue.

Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:(only available in the USA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRstate/province, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keywordThe keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐tination.Yes cancels the current route guidance andstarts route calculation to the new destina-tion.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

PrerequisitesFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRText messages and e-mail

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be obtained on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centeron 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connect-ing) a mobile phoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particular

security settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phoneMultimedia system:X Select Tel/®QConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobilephone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.

244 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Connect Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)RCDRDVD (COMAND)RSD cardsRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVDchanger (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Using the device listMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting/removing anSDmemory card

Important safety notesG WARNINGSDmemory cards are small parts. They can beswallowed and cause asphyxiation. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Keep SD memory cards out of the reach ofchildren. If an SD memory card is swallowed,seek immediate medical attention.

! If you are no longer using the SD memorycard, you should remove it and take it out ofthe vehicle. High temperatures can damagethe card.

Inserting an SD memory cardThe SD card slot is on the control panel.X Insert the SD memory card into the SD cardslot until it engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

Ejecting an SD memory cardX Press the memory card.The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devicesThere are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 245).


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Stowage areas

Stowage spaces


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

In the glove box, there are a coin holder, a mapholder and a pen holder.

i The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 121).

The glove box can be locked and unlocked usingthe mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it to position1.

Stowage compartment/telephonecompartment under the armrest

X To open: press button:.Armrest; folds out.

In the stowage compartment, there is a stowagetray.

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USBport and a Media Interface is installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interface is auniversal interface for mobile audio equip-ment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 Player .

246 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.Eyeglasses compartment; opens.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

X To open: press the trim element on cover:.X To remove the rubber mat: grasp the tabson the rubber mat and pull up to remove.

X To insert the rubber mat: press the rubbermat into the housing.

X To close: swing cover: downwards until itengages.

You can remove the rubber mat from the stow-age compartment to clean it. Clean with clear,lukewarm water only.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there isa cup holder and an ashtray in the center con-sole stowage compartment.

Umbrella holder

Example: vehicle side, leftThere are umbrella holders in the door stowagecompartments on both sides of the vehicle. Onecompact umbrella can be stowed per side.X To remove: grab strap; and pull umbrellaholder: out of the stowage compartment inthe direction of the arrow.

X To insert: push umbrella holder: in theopposite direction to the arrow, into the stow-age compartment until it engages.

You can remove the umbrella holder to clean it.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Stowage compartment in the rear cen-ter console

X To open: slide cover: in the direction of thearrow.

On vehicles equipped with a bottle holder, thebottle holder is located in the stowage compart-ment (Y page 250).

Stowage areas 247

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in the rear

Only the left side of the vehicle features a rearstowage compartment.X Open the seat belt guide and remove the seatbelt (Y page 96).

X Move the left-hand front seat forwards(Y page 97) and fold the seat backrest for-wards.

X To open: press release button;.Cover: folds upwards.

X To close: fold down cover: and let itengage.

X Fold back the seat backrest of the left-handfront seat and move the seat back(Y page 97).

X Insert the seat belt back into the seat beltguide.

Stowage net

There is a stowage net: in the front-passengerfootwell.

Loading aid in the trunk

Raising/lowering the roof

G WARNINGBody parts can become trappedwhen the roofis being raised or lowered. There is a risk ofinjury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no parts of the body are in the vicinity ofmoving parts. Press the switch again if some-one becomes trapped.

! Only close the trunk once the roof is loweredcompletely. Otherwise, you could damage theroof.If you close the trunk lid before the roof islowered completely, the loading aid switchlights up and a warning tone sounds.

To make it easier to load your luggage, you canraise the stowed roof after you have opened thetrunk lid.You can only raise roof; when the trunk lid isfully open.X To raise the roof: press switch:.Roof; is raised slightly and trunk partition= moves to the open position. Switch:lights up brightly.

X To lower the roof: press switch:.The trunk partition moves to the closed posi-tion and roof; lowers slightly. Switch:lights up dimly.Vehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature: when the trunk lid is opened, theloading aid raises automatically. It lowersautomatically when the trunk lid is closed.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS: when the trunk lid is opened,

248 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

the loading aid rises automatically. When theroof is closed, the trunk partition remains inthe open position. The trunk partition movesto the closed position automatically when theroof is lowered.

Stowage areas 249

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Problems with the loading aid


It is no longer possible tolower the stowed roof inthe trunk using the load-ing aid.

You cannot close the trunk any more.X Call a qualified specialist workshop.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

X To open: open trunk partition; (Y page 89).X Swing trunk floor= upwards using loop:.The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.

Features

Cup holder


G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.

RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Cup holder in the center console

X To open: open stowage compartment=(Y page 247).

X To remove the insert: slide catches:inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove the cup holder insert upwards.X To re-install the insert: place the insert instowage compartment=.

X Slide catches: outwards in the direction ofthe arrow until they engage.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat forcleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarmwater only.

250 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Reducer; can be removed. Large and smallcontainers can then be placed in the cup holder.X To remove: grasp reducer; and pullupwards in the direction of the arrow.

X To insert: insert reducer; into the cupholder in the opposite direction of the arrowand press it down firmly.

Bottle holderObserve the "Important safety notes" in the"Stowage compartments" section (Y page 246).

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 247).

X To remove the insert: slide catches:inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Lift bottle holder insert; up and remove.X To re-install the insert: place insert; in thestowage compartment.

X Slide catches: outwards in the direction ofthe arrow until they engage.

The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; itmerely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Ashtray

X To open: open stowage compartment:(Y page 247).

X To remove the insert: pull insert; up in thedirection of the arrow, out of the cup holder.

X To re-install the insert:push insert; on theleft-hand side into the cup holder.

i Only re-install insert; on the left-hand sideof the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.

Features 251

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X To open: open stowage compartment:under the armrest (Y page 246).

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the

sockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

Socket in the front-passenger footwell

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.

252 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and password will be sent toyou by post.USA only: you can use this password to log ontothe mbrace area under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of COMAND.The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ative or Service Not Activatedmessageappears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearest author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-lowing service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Features 253

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To register, pressthe ï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-gered.

i You cannot end an automatically triggeredemergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

attempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emer-gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-ately after pressing the SOS button, you willnot know whether mbrace placed the emer-gency call. In this case, always summon assis-tance by other means.

254 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. Themultifunction display shows the Connect‐ing Call message. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The COMAND display indicates that a call isactive. During the call, you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVI buttonon COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 256).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.

Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending aphone call on COMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Callmessage. The audio system ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

Features 255

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

i The COMAND display indicates that a call isactive. During the call, you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVI buttonon COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiate anMB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button:is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending aphone call on COMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRor the corresponding COMAND button forending a telephone call

i When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted. The mobile phone is no longer con-nected to COMAND. However, if you want touse your mobile phone, do so only when thevehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center. The customer ser-vice representative can use the received data todecide what kind of assistance is required. Youare then, for example, guided to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recoveryvehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐nectedmessage in the COMAND display. If thevehicle remote malfunction diagnosis can bestarted, the Request for vehicle diagno‐sis received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.X Confirm the message with Yes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignition message appears, turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 124).

X When the Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position mes-sage appears, follow the customer servicerepresentative's instructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel the remote malfunctiondiagnosis is canceled completely.The vehicle operating state check begins. Youwill see the Vehicle diagnosis activatedmessage.

When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voiceconnection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent to the Customer Assis-tance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.

256 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

You will see the Vehicle diagnosis:Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance Center. If a service is overdue, theCOMAND display shows a message about vari-ous special offers at your workshop.USA only: this information can also be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 25).

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garagedoor opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 26).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4


G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.


Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 257).

Features 257

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-gramed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 258).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 257).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".

258 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofremote controlA for the garage door drive.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units which

operate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles and from but-tons; to?which you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle butat varying distances.RIf another remote controlA is available forthe same garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote controlA. Before performing these steps,make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Press buttons;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Features 259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats


X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers;.X Remove the floormat.

260 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Engine compartment

Hood


G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

Engine compartment 261

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift hood:.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil levelDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surfaceRthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperatureRif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait about 30minutes before carryingout the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick


ExampleX Pull out oil dipstick:.X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil


262 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that havebeen approved for vehicles with a service sys-tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oilsand oil filters tested and approved in accord-ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products at any Mercedes-BenzService center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have notbeen specifically approved for the servicesystemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after theinterval for replacement specified by theservice system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 262).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 314).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level


G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

Example

Engine compartment 263

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 124).

X Check the coolant temperature gauge in themultifunction display.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 124)in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap; half a turn counter-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap; further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank:.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fuel fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolant inexpansion tank:.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap; and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 315).

Windshield washer system


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum fluid level of 1 US gal (1 liter),a message appears in the multifunction displayprompting you to addwasher fluid (Y page 229).Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 316).

Overview of the engine compartment

Example engine: Oil dipstick; Brake fluid reservoir= Engine oil cap? Coolant expansion tankA Washer fluid reservoir

264 Overview of the engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 262).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type of ser-vice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-ing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can be

ASSYST PLUS 265

Maintenance

andcare

Z

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Care

Notes on care

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! It is preferable to use car washes withadjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning thatcorresponds to the specification for the Cab-riolet program. In car washes that use highwater pressures, there is a risk that a smallamount of water may leak into the vehicle.

! Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if aSmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within thedetection range of the KEYLESS-GO antenna,the following situations could lead to the unin-tentional opening of the trunk lid:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 6.5 ft(2 m) away from the vehicle.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.If you have your vehicle cleaned in a high-pressure automatic car wash, small amountsof water may enter the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmissionis in position N when washing your vehicle ina tow-through car wash. The vehicle could bedamaged if the transmission is in anotherposition.

266 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof are com-pletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RTiresRDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.RSoft top (Designo retractable hardtop)RElectrical componentsRBatteryRConnectorsRLightsRSealsRTrimRVentilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

! Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if aSmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within thedetection range of the KEYLESS-GO antenna,the following situations could lead to the unin-tentional opening of the trunk lid:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 6.5 ft(2 m) away from the vehicle.

! Mille Miglia special model: parts of yourvehicle are covered with a decorative foil.Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm betweenthe foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and thenozzle of the power washer.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar items

Care 267

Maintenance

andcare

Z

to painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish

leads to considerable surface damage (shiny,mottled areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

268 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise, youwill damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lightswith a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

Care 269

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clean water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.

270 CareMaintenance

andcare

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe towing eye is located in the trunk in abracket below the trunk lid lock.If the vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit, thisis located in the stowage well under the floor ofthe trunk.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kitThe TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor (Y page 250).

: Towing eye; Tire sealant filler bottle= Fuse allocation chart? Tire inflation compressorA Stowage tray recessX To remove towing eye:, lift the stowage trayat recessA.

X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 273).

Tire-change tool kitThe tire-change tool kit can be found in thestowagewell under the trunk floor (Y page 250).

: Bag containing the tire-changing toolsBag: with tire-changing tools contains:RJackRLug wrenchRAlignment boltRWheel chockRGlovesDepending on the equipment, tools required fora wheel change, such as a jack or a lug wrench,are not available in all vehicles. Tools approvedfor your vehicle are available at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:Rtires with run-flat characteristics(MOExtended tires) (Y page 272)Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 271)Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 304).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 145).

Flat tire 271

Breakdow

nassistance

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-er's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 124).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 299).MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 225).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden and approximately 19miles(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, please observethe following specifications for your vehicle'stires:RsizeRtype andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may beused as a temporary measure. Make sure thatyou use the proper size and type (summer orwinter tire).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit is available, for exam-ple, from a qualified specialist workshop.


G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.

272 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflationcompressor from the stowage well under-neath the trunk floor (Y page 271).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

Flat tire 273

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA out ofthe housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealantbottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwardsinto recess; of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto the valve.X Insert plug? into the socket of the cigarettelighter or into a 12 V power socket in yourvehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 124).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof fiveminutes. The tire should then

have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes: (Y page 274).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:(Y page 274).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Note that tire sealant may escape when youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.

274 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part ofthe TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru-ment cluster in the driver's field of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come outof the filler hose after use. This could causestains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen achieved after a maximum period of tenminutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-sure release buttonEnext to pressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit and

Battery (vehicle) 275

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

thus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 58) and (Y page 63).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or

sparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.

276 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contactwith skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physicianif necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.After an interruption to the power supply, e.g.due to a discharged battery, you must reset theclock (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

Battery (vehicle) 277

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment.If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up atlow temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case, youmay neither charge the battery nor jump-startthe vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out bat-tery may be shorter. The starting characteristicscan be impaired, particularly at low tempera-tures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.Read the battery charger's operating instruc-tions before charging the battery.X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 279).

278 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start thevehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Jump-starting 279

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:RThe jumper cables are not damaged.RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with othermetal parts while the jumpercables are connected to the battery.RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 124).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Press cover: of positive terminal; down (in the direction of the arrow) and turn it clockwise.To expose positive terminal;, press cover: down further.

X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryB using thejumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

280 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then from pos-itive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X After the jumper cable is removed, return cover: of positive terminal; to the original position.Positive terminal; is covered up and thus insulated again.

X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 311).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance PilotDISTRONIC or the HOLD function are activa-ted, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer-tain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could bedamaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recoverthe vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.Otherwise, the automatic transmission mayshift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could leadto damage to the transmission.

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed.

Towing and tow-starting 281

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Rcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 200). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the front andat the rear, behind the covers.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 271).

X Front bumper: insert a finger into the recesson the bottom edge of cover:.

X Pull cover: out of the bumper towards youin the direction of the arrow.Cover: is attached to the opening with astrap.

X Rear bumper: press the mark on cover:inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove cover: from the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Front bumper: position cover: on theopening in the bumper.

X To close, press the lower section of cover:.X Rear bumper: position cover: with the tabon the opening in the bumper.

X To close, press the lower section of cover:until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

The automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock.In order to ensure that the automatic transmis-sion stays in positionNwhen towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 107).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 0 in the igni-tion lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Smart-Key instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 124).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the transmission to position N.X Release the brake pedal.

282 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. When you resetthe combination switch, the hazard warningflashers start flashing again.It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 281).

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! The ignition must be switched off if you aretowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised.Intervention by ESP® could otherwise dam-age the brake system.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be towed with the rear axle raised. Thevehicle/trailer combination may otherwiseswerve or even roll over.

Transporting the vehicle

Vehicles with automatic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the transmission to position N.As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting" at(Y page 279).

Fuses


G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.

Fuses 283

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicletool kit in the stowage compartment under thetrunk floor (Y page 271).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseX Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 124).

orX When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 124).

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 145).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theright-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travelRDashboard fuse boxRFuse box in the rear compartment on theright-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travel

Dashboard fuse boxi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 283).

! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartmenti Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 283).

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

284 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X To open: open clamps;.X Fold cover: of the fuse box up in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover:.

X Insert both openings= at the rear ofcover: into the brackets on the fuse box.The brackets on the fuse box must be com-pletely visible in the two openings= on thefuse box.

X Fold down cover:.X Hook clamps; into the fuse box and close.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the reari Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 283).

The fuse box in the rear is located on the right-handside when viewed in the direction of travel.

X To open: open the seat belt guide on theright-hand seat and remove the seat belt(Y page 96).

X Move the right-hand seat as far forward aspossible (Y page 97).

X Insert your fingers at the bottom of frontcover; between the cover and floor cover-ing.

X Remove front cover; by pulling it forward inthe direction of the arrow.

X Lift off top cover: by pulling it in the direc-tion of the arrow.

Fuses= are accessible through the two open-ings in the top of the fuse box.

X To close: insert the securing tags underneathtop cover: in the recesses at the top of thefuse box.

X Fold down top cover: until it engages audi-bly.

X Insert the securing tags underneath topcover; in the recesses at the front of thefuse box.

X Push front cover; towards the rear until itengages audibly.

X Move the right-hand seat backwards(Y page 97).

X Hook the seat belt into the seat belt guide onthe right-hand seat (Y page 96).

Fuses 285

Breakdow

nassistance

Z


G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tirescan be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"(Y page 308).You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 295)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 144)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

286 OperationWheelsandtires

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 287). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 289).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator fortread wear (arrow) is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 272).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

Operation 287

Wheelsandtires

Z

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure monitor andonly on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 272).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 304).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 292).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 294).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle by

288 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist workshop.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 308).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).ROn vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC), ifsnow chains have been installed, you mustdrive at a raised vehicle level (Y page 166).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains installed (Y page 63).You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 295).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure 289

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can befound on the tire sidewall (Y page 299).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire does

290 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

not permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it istoo low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 289).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Tire pressure 291

Wheelsandtires

Z

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 289).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flapRin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 289).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the Serv. menu of the multifunctiondisplay.

Example: current tire pressure displayFor information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 293).


G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.


USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 289). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 294). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 289).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 225).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 124).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

Tire pressure 293

Wheelsandtires

Z

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a few minutesmessage appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activedisplay message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures are alreadybeing monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in themultifunction display,the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.The tire pressure must be corrected when theopportunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 225).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tire

pressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 289).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 289).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.


X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure for the individual tires or theTire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.


Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Loading the vehicle 295

Wheelsandtires

Z

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how tocalculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number andsize of occupants. The following examples use aload limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illus-tration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle statedon your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 295).The greater the combined weight of the occu-pants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined max-imumweight ofoccupants andcargo (datafrom the Tireand LoadingInformationplacard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of peo-ple in the vehi-cle (driver andoccupants)

1 2

Weight of theoccupants

Occu-pant 1:175 lbs(80 kg)

Occu-pant 1:175 lbs(80 kg)Occu-pant 2:195 lbs(88 kg)

Gross weightof all occupants

175 lbs(80 kg)

370 lbs(168 kg)

296 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissibleload (maxi-mum grossvehicle weightrating from theTire and Load-ing Informationplacard minusthe grossweight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò175 lbs(80 kg) =1325 lbs(600 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò370 lbs(168 kg) =1130 lbs(512 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 295).Permissible gross vehicle weight: the grossweight of the vehicle, all passengers and theload must not exceed the permissible grossvehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants and the load) weighed on a suitable vehi-cle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.


TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as well

All about wheels and tires 297

Wheelsandtires

Z

on the government test track as a tire graded100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 287). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 302)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 301)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 301)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 291)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 302)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 299)D Load index (Y page 301)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

298 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure that

are only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the sizeratio between the tire height and tire width andis shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the sizedescription, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 295).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 301).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 301).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.

Summertires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)


Wheelsandtires

Z

Summertires

Index Speed rating

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weathertires andwintertires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding the following speeds:R130 mph (210 km/h):

- All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

R155 mph (250 km/h):- Mercedes-AMG SL 63- Mercedes-AMG SL 65R186 mph (300 km/h):

- Mercedes-AMG SL 63 (Performance Pack-age)

- Mercedes-AMG SL 65 increased maximumspeed

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "tires" section (Y page 308).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.


Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. You will find this after the letter thatidentifies the speed rating (Y page 299).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure


Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 295).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with therequirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 308).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire typecode: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked "3214" wasmanufactured in week 32in 2014.


Wheelsandtires

Z


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.


Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating is the maximum per-missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.

The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.


Wheelsandtires

Z

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 271) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 272).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 304).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this maybe required earlier. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate thetire pressure monitor if necessary.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Unload the vehicle. The jack can only be usedwhen the vehicle is unladen.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.

304 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-er's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 124).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 271).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.

Changing a wheel 305

Wheelsandtires

Z

RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicleswith alloy wheels and hub caps: thewheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before youcan unscrew the wheel bolts, you must removethe hub cap. Two different variants can be instal-led.

X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 271).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Position lug wrench= on socket;.X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun-ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap:and the wheel area for soiling and clean ifnecessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is inthe right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightenedto the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap installed at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of the rearwheel housings (arrows).Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles withAMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-ing points on the outer sills.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: fold cover?upwards.

306 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankC clockwise until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankC until the tire is raised a maxi-mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removaland repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam-age it. Therefore, you should proceed care-fully and get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second alignmentbolt.

! Donot placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 304).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

Changing a wheel 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removaland repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam-age it. Therefore, you should proceed care-fully and get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second alignmentbolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwiseuntil the vehicle is once again standing firmlyon the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the trunk again.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: insert the cover intothe outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 289).

Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all installed wheels must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.When you are driving with the emergency sparewheel mounted, the tire pressure monitor can-not function reliably. Only restart the tire pres-suremonitor when the defectivewheel has beenreplaced with a new wheel.Allmountedwheelsmust be equippedwith func-tioning sensors for the tire pressure monitor.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.

308 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 289).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rwith the same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 272).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-ics! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, such ascontrol units, sensors, actuating componentsand connector leads, at a qualified specialistworkshop. Vehicle components may other-wise wear more quickly and the vehicle'soperating permit may be invalidated.

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-

cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible outputin these wavebands.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.The following antenna positions may be used ifRF transmitters have been properly installed:

Approved antenna positions: Rear fender

i On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of the vehicleclosest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for accessoryparts.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-plement when installing.

310 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

Deviations with respect to frequency bands,maximum transmission outputs or antennapositions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Frequency band Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There are no restrictions when positioning theantenna on the outside of the vehicle for thefollowing wavebands:RTrunked radio system/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only): VIN; Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only): VIN; Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

Identification plates 311

Technicaldata

Z

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Move the front-passenger front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold up floor covering: in front of the front-passenger seat.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 312)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 311)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, includ-ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties


G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respect tohandling, storing, and disposing of service flu-ids.Components and service products must match.You should therefore only use products thathave been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approved prod-ucts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can identify service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions onthe container:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.51). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

312 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

All models 19.8 US gal(75.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

All other models Approx.2.4 US gal(9.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-age to the fuel system, engine and exhaustsystem.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.

Service products and filling capacities 313

Technicaldata

Z

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 144).

Additives in gasoline! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The fuel quality available in some countries maynot be sufficient. Residue could build up in thefuel injection system as a result. In such cases,and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixedwith the cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 312).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

All models 229.5

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: use only SAE 0W-40or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.


Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

SL 550 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Mercedes‑AMGSL 63

Mercedes‑AMGSL 65

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 312).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 312).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible forthe following:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).

Service products and filling capacities 315

Technicaldata

Z

SL 450

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

Approx. 10.8 US qt(10.2 l)

SL 550 Approx. 12.5 US qt(11.8 l)

Mercedes‑AMGSL 63

Mercedes‑AMGSL 65

Windshield washer system


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 312).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant orreplacing component parts, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-


SL 450

cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,must be adhered to.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:RPossible dangersRHaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

All models 19.4 ± 0.4 oz(550 ± 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

75.6 in - 76.1 in(1920 mm -1934 mm)

All other models 75.7 in (1923 mm)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.


Vehicle length 182.7 in (4640 mm)

Vehicle lengthwhen opening/clos-ing the roof

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

82.6 in (2099 mm)

Vehicle data 317

Technicaldata

Z


Vehicle height 51.2 in - 51.5 in(1300 mm -1308 mm)

Vehicle height,when opening/clos-ing the roof

66.1 in - 66.6 in(1679 mm -1691 mm)

Wheelbase 101.7 in (2584 mm)

Turning radius

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length, 181.6 in (4612 mm)

Vehicle length,SL 550

182.3 in (4631 mm)

Vehicle lengthwhen opening/clos-

188.9 in (4798 mm)

Vehicle lengthwhen opening/clos-ing the roof, SL 550

188.5 in (4787 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

82.6 in (2099 mm)

Vehicle height 51.8 in (1315 mm)

Vehicle height,when opening/clos-ing the roof

66.8 in (1696 mm)

Wheelbase 101.8 in (2585 mm)

Turning radius 36.2 ft (11.04 m)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

318 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

SL 450

ing the roof, SL 450

sl - mercedes-benz usa · sl operator'smanual orderno.p231005313 partno.2315842101...

Documents